Jaguar Jjm 18 02 30 701 Users Manual
JJM 18 02 30 701 to the manual 252a2b91-d9a8-4275-9653-62b558204f78
2015-02-09
: Jaguar Jaguar-Jjm-18-02-30-701-Users-Manual-566666 jaguar-jjm-18-02-30-701-users-manual-566666 jaguar pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 260 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

R
OWNER’S HANDBOOK
Publication Part No. JJM 18 02 30 701
2
L
This handbook forms part of the Owner literature supplied with your vehicle. Right-hand
drive and left-hand drive situations are shown in the graphics and where information is
specific to a particular country, it is indicated as such.
The Quick Start section is designed to rapidly familiarise the driver with the initial set up
and also explain some of the unique features. Please take the time to study the operating
instructions with your vehicle as soon as you can.
Important
The information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional
equipment . Some of the options will not be fitted to your vehicle unless they formed part
of the original vehicle specification. Therefore, some parts of this handbook may not
apply to your vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles, it may include descriptions of
options before they become generally available.
The information contained in this publication was correct when it went to print. Vehicle
design changes may have been made after this handbook was printed. When this occurs
a handbook supplement is added to the literature pack. Subsequent updates can be
viewed on the Jaguar internet site at http://www.ownerinfo.jaguar.com.
In the interest of development, the right is reserved to change specifications, design or
equipment at any time without notice and without incurring any obligations. This
publication, or part thereof, may not be produced nor translated without our approval.
Errors and omissions excepted.
©Jaguar Cars Limited 2006.
All rights reserved.
Published by Jaguar Cars Limited Technical Communications.

Handbook Contents
3
R
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Filling Station Information . . . . . . . . . . 27
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . 33
Keys and Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . 34
Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Engine Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fuel and Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Driving Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Wipers and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Windows and Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Occupant Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Child Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Facia and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Convenience Features . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Convertible Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Load Carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Stability Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . 172
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) . . . . . 180
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Status After a Collision . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Vehicle Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Vehicle Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Wheels and Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . 282
Type Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
A comprehensive index is located at the
back of this handbook.
4
L

Quick Start
5
R
Quick Start
Quick Start
KEYLESS ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
REMOTE HANDSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CENTRAL LOCKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . 8
ENGINE START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SEAT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
STEERING COLUMN - LOCK AND
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INTERIOR MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
WINDOWS/DOOR MIRRORS . . . . . . . 11
SEAT POSITION MEMORY . . . . . . . . 11
SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CENTRE CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . 13
CLIMATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
FACIA AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . 15
EXTERIOR LAMPS/TRIP COMPUTER 17
WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . 17
WARNING INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . 17
PARKBRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PARKING ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
CRUISE (SPEED) CONTROL . . . . . . . 21
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) 21
TOUCH-SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SOUND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
RADIO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
CD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
NAVIGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
TELEPHONE -
BLUETOOTH SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Filling Station Information
FUEL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
HOOD RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
UNDERHOOD TOP-UP . . . . . . . . . . . 28
ULTRA HIGH PERFORMANCE
TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
TIRE PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6
L

7
Quick Start
R
Quick Start
KEYLESS ENTRY
Entering the vehicle
The keyless entry system allows access
to the vehicle without the need for
pressing the unlock button on the remote
handset.
When a door handle, or the luggage
compartment release button are
operated, the vehicle will search for a
recognised remote handset signal before
unlocking. The handset must be within
one metre of the entry point.
The buttons on the remote handset can
be used to lock/unlock the vehicle when
approaching or leaving the vehicle.
Leaving the vehicle
The vehicle will not automatically lock, or
arm the alarm. To leave the vehicle in a
secure condition either:
•press the button on the door handle
once (arrowed in the illustration)
•or press the lock button on the remote
handset.
REMOTE HANDSET
•Press once to lock the vehicle and
arm the alarm.
•Press twice within three seconds to
double lock the vehicle.
•Press once to disarm the alarm,
unlock the driver’s door, and unlock
the luggage compartment.
•Press again to unlock the passenger
door.
•Press once to switch the headlamps
on for 25 seconds. Press again to
switch off.
•Press to deactivate the alarm, and
unlock the luggage compartment.
JAG0424G
JAG0423G

8
Quick Start
L
•Press three times in three seconds, or
press and hold for longer than three
seconds to activate/cancel the panic
alarm.
Unlocking mode alternatives
Single stage unlocking will unlock the
vehicle with a single press. Two stage
unlocking will unlock the driver’s door
with a single press, and all other doors
with a second press.
To change between modes, press and
hold the unlock button for four seconds.
The direction indicators will flash twice to
confirm the change.
CENTRAL LOCKING
Interior door locks
Press either of the interior door release
levers to lock both doors and the luggage
compartment.
Pull the release lever to unlock the door.
Drive away door locking
This feature can be enabled or disabled
via the Vehicle - Security settings on the
touch-screen.
If enabled, the luggage compartment and
doors will automatically lock when the
vehicle’s forward speed exceeds 7 km/h
(5 mph).
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
Caution: If the luggage compartment is
opened when the driver and passenger
doors are locked, ensure that the
Jaguar Smart Key remains outside the
vehicle when it is closed again. If the
Jaguar Smart key is inadvertently left
inside the vehicle (luggage
compartment) an audible alarm will
sound and the luggage compartment
lid will initially re-open. If the lid is
subsequently closed without removing
the Jaguar Smart Key from the luggage
compartment, you will be locked out.
You should contact your Jaguar
Dealer.
The luggage compartment is electrically
locked in conjunction with the driver’s
door.
To open the luggage compartment with
the vehicle locked:
•press the luggage compartment
button on the remote handset.
To open the luggage compartment with
the vehicle unlocked:
•press the button on the facia.
Or:
•press the release button on the
luggage compartment lid.
JAG0425G

9
Quick Start
R
Emergency key blade access
In the event of a discharged vehicle
battery, or other problem opening the
luggage compartment, it can be opened
by using the key blade in the luggage
compartment lock.
Care points
•The registration plate has to be
removed to access the luggage
compartment lock.
•The vehicle’s alarm will sound if the
luggage compartment is unlocked
with the key blade, whilst the vehicle
is locked.
ENGINE START/STOP
The engine START/STOP button is only
operational when a recognised remote
handset is detected within the vehicle.
•A single press of the engine start/stop
button will switch on the ignition
system.
•Another press of the switch will switch
off the ignition system.
•With the gear selector in P (Park) and
the brake pedal depressed, press the
engine START/STOP button to start
the engine.
•Press the button to stop the engine
and switch off the ignition.
JAG0426G
JAG0427G
JAG0428G

10
Quick Start
L
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
1. Cushion extension switch.
2. Lower backrest and lumbar support
switch.
3. Recline adjustment switch.
4. Side bolster adjustment switch.
Rotate to adjust the side bolster
cushions.
5. Fore/aft, cushion height, and front tilt
control switch.
Note: Seat heating adjustment is via the
main touch-screen, see page 61.
STEERING COLUMN - LOCK
AND ADJUSTMENT
Steering column lock
The steering column has an electronic
lock that is automatically disengaged
whenever a recognised remote handset is
inside the vehicle.
Vehicle recovery
Caution: If the vehicle requires
recovery assistance, the remote
handset must remain in the vehicle to
prevent the steering column lock
engaging.
Steering column adjustment
Turn the control on the left-hand side of
the steering column to COLUMN and
move to adjust the height and reach.
Automatic steering column movement
If the control is set to AUTO, the position
of the steering column will automatically
adjust to provide greater clearance for
exit and entry when the driver’s door is
opened for exiting the vehicle.
The steering column will return to the
driving position when the driver’s door is
closed and the engine start button is
pressed.
Note: To prevent automatic movement of
the steering column, turn the control to
the COLUMN position.
INTERIOR MIRROR
With the ignition on, the rear view mirror
will automatically darken in proportion to
the amount of glare detected from a
following vehicle’s headlamps. This
feature is automatically switched off when
reverse gear is selected.
JAG0429 L
1
2
3
45
JAG0430G

11
Quick Start
R
WINDOWS/DOOR MIRRORS
Front windows
The windows are fitted with a facility that
allows them to be fully opened or closed
with a single operation of the switch.
•To open the window, press the
respective switch. Press the switch
again to stop the window from fully
opening.
•To close the window, pull the switch
up. Pull the switch again to prevent to
window from closing fully.
Door mirror adjustment
Press the L (left) or R (right) button to
select the required mirror for adjustment.
Use the four-way switch 1 to adjust the
position of the selected mirror.
Mirror dip when reversing
The passenger door mirror can be
programmed to dip automatically when R
(reverse) is selected. This will provide a
better view along the side of the vehicle to
aid parking. The dip position of the mirror
can be adjusted via the four-way switch.
This feature can be enabled/disabled via
the Vehicle - Parking settings on the
Touch-screen.
SEAT POSITION MEMORY
Driver’s seat
Once you have adjusted the driver’s seat,
steering column, and exterior mirrors, the
vehicle can memorise these settings for
future use.
1. Push the memory button M, the red
LED will illuminate for five seconds.
2. Whilst the LED is illuminated, press
button 1, 2, or 3, to memorise the
current settings.
The LED will extinguish, and a chime will
sound to confirm that the settings have
been memorised. If the ignition is on, the
message centre will display a
confirmation message.
Passenger seat
The procedure to memorise a passenger
seat position is the same as that for the
driver’s seat with two exceptions. There
will be no chime or message to confirm
the settings.
JAG0431 L
1
JAG0432L

12
Quick Start
L
Recalling a seat position
To recall a memorised seat position,
simply press and hold button 1, 2, or 3.
The button should be held until the seat
has stopped moving.
Note: A seat position will only be
memorised during the five second period
whilst the LED is illuminated.
Any existing settings will be over-written
when programming a memory position.
SEAT BELTS
!WARNING:
The use of front and rear seat belts is
mandatory in most countries.
Using seat belts saves lives.
A warning indicator on the instrument
panel will illuminate to warn you that the
driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat belt
is unbuckled. This may also be
accompanied by a warning chime.
CENTRE CONSOLE
Operate the release button, and slide the
armrest rearwards to access the cup
holders.
To open the cubby box, operate the
release button, and lift the armrest. The
armrest will slide back under it’s own
weight to provide better access to the
cubby box.
The cubby box has space to store six
standard CD cases.
JAG0433L
JAG0434L

13
Quick Start
R
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Caution: Do not open or close the
convertible top whilst the vehicle is in
motion. Doing so may damage the
convertible top and/or it’s operating
mechanism.
Do not press the engine stop/start
button whilst the convertible top is
opening or closing. Doing so will cause
the system to loose it’s position
memory.
Convertible top
When operating the convertible top, the
switch must be pressed, and held, until
the second chime is heard. The second
chime confirms that the convertible top
has reached the end of it’s operation.
•To open press and hold the rear of
switch 1. The windows will fully open.
•To close press and hold the front of
switch 1.
Rear windows
The rear windows can be operated when
the convertible top is closed.
•To open press and release the rear of
switch 1. The windows will open fully.
•To close press and hold the front of
switch 1. Release the switch to stop
raising the windows.
Garage door opener
For information on the Garage door
opener buttons 2, see page 143.
CLIMATE CONTROL
The following are the primary functions of
the climate control system. The climate
control system can also be operated via
the touch-screen, which gives access to
other features, such as heated
seats/steering wheel.
Auto (automatic) mode
Press AUTO to turn on and select
automatic operation of the climate control
system. The system will automatically
adjust the heat output, blower speed, air
intake, and airflow distribution, to
maintain the selected temperature, and
reduce misting without the need for
constant manual adjustments.
The front and rear screen heating, and
timed air recirculation, may be selected in
AUTO mode. Selecting any other
function will cancel AUTO operation.
Air conditioning
Air conditioning is an integral part of the
climate control system. The air provided
is cooled and dehumidified, which helps
to prevent misting of the windows.
Air conditioning is automatically switched
on and controlled, whenever the system is
operating in AUTO or DEF modes.
JAG0562N
2
1
JAG0505N

14
Quick Start
L
External water deposits
The air conditioning system removes
moisture from the air and deposits excess
water beneath the vehicle. Puddles may
form, but this is normal, and no cause for
concern.
Recommended mode
Select AUTO as the normal operating
mode. This will help prevent window
misting and odours from the climate
control system.
Air recirculation
Press the recirculation button to select. A
symbol will appear on the Touch-screen
and an LED in the button will illuminate.
To de-select air recirculation, press the
recirculation button again, or press the
AUTO button.
Blower speed
Set the blower speed as required by
adjusting the rotary control knob. Any
adjustment of the knob will cancel AUTO
mode.
Temperature selection
Press the red buttons to increase the
temperature, and the blue buttons to
decrease the temperature.
The passenger and driver temperatures
will automatically synchronise if HI or LO
is selected via the driver’s side control.
Windshield defrost/demist
Press the DEF button to remove frost or
heavy misting from the windshield. To
de-select defrost mode, press the DEF or
AUTO buttons.
Heated screen and door mirrors
The rear screen heater can be switched
on and off in any mode, even when the
climate control system is off. It will only
operate when the engine is running.
The door mirror heaters are controlled by
the rear screen heater button.
System off
Select the ON/OFF button located under
the Climate tab on the touch-screen.
Climate

15
Quick Start
R
FACIA AND CONTROLS
Auto
km
Inst Fuel
l/100km
JAG0511N
23
25
27
28
26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1720
19
18
22
24
16
15
29
21

16
Quick Start
L
1. Steering wheel audio switches (64).
2. External light switches (71).
3. Jaguar sequential gear change down
paddle (159).
4. Speedometer (111).
5. Driver’s horn and air bag (63).
6. Message centre (118).
7. Tachometer (111).
8. Jaguar sequential gear change up
paddle (159).
9. Wiper and washer switch (65).
10. Cruise control or adaptive cruise
control switches (169).
11. Audio panel (184).
12. Hazard warning switch (76).
13. Touch-screen display (121).
14. Climate control panel (134).
15. Glove box compartment release
button (142).
16. Gear selector (157).
17. Automatic speed limiter switch (180).
18. Parkbrake switch (164).
19. Dynamic stability control mode switch
(166).
20. Engine Start and Stop switch (50).
21. Ashtray and cigar lighter (140).
22. Steering column adjustment switch
(62).
23. Front fog lamp switch (75).
24. Dimmer switch (140).
25. Rear fog lamp switch (75).
26. Luggage compartment release switch
(43).
27. Forward alert switch (177).
28. Fuel filler flap release switch (52).
29. Hood release lever (234).
Page numbers (shown in brackets) refer
to pages in this handbook that have
further relevant information.

17
Quick Start
R
EXTERIOR LAMPS/TRIP
COMPUTER
Move the stalk up or down to activate the
direction indicators.
Press the button on the end of the stalk to
cycle through the trip computer displays.
Rotate the collar on the stalk to select:
•sidelamps
•headlamps
•autolamps
•headlamp exit delay.
In AUTO mode, a sensor monitors the
exterior light levels. The sensor will
automatically switch the sidelamps and
dipped headlamps on and off.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
A. Intermittent wipe.
B. Slow speed operation.
C. High speed operation.
Press the button on the end of the stalk
for wash/wipe. Rotate the collar to adjust
the time delay for intermittent wipe, or to
select AUTO for automatic operation of
the wipers.
Enabling automatic operation
The wiper stalk must be in position A and
AUTO selected on the collar to enable
automatic operation of the wipers.
WARNING INDICATORS
Sidelamps on. (Green).
Headlamp main beam on. (Blue).
Front fog lamps on. (Green).
JAG0438G
JAG0439G
A
B
C

18
Quick Start
L
Rear fog lamp on. (Amber).
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) active.
(Green).
Direction indicator. (Green).
Seat belt reminder. (Red).
Forward alert active. (Amber).
Parkbrake on/Low brake fluid (Red)
(USA only)
Anti-Lock braking system fault (Amber)
(USA only)
Parkbrake on/Low brake fluid (Red)
(Canada and Mexico only).
Anti-Lock braking system fault (Amber)
(Canada and Mexico only).
Engine malfunction. (Amber).
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) off
(normally aspirated engines only).
TracDSC ON.
DSC system fault (Amber).
Adaptive Cruise Control active. (Amber).
Air bag system fault. (Amber).
Adaptive front lighting system fault.
(Amber).
Low tire pressure warning. (Yellow).

19
Quick Start
R
Automatic exterior lamps
If AUTO (autolamps) has been selected,
and the windshield wipers are operated
continuously for more than twenty
seconds, then the exterior lamps will be
switched on automatically.
PARKBRAKE
•Parkbrake will automatically release
when the gear selector is moved from
P (Park) with the footbrake applied.
•Parkbrake can be manually released
when the engine is running and the
footbrake is applied. Press the
parkbrake switch down to release,
and pull it up to apply.
•If manually applied whilst in D or R,
the Parkbrake will automatically
release when the accelerator is
applied.
TRANSMISSION
Gearshift interlock
The ignition must be on, and the
footbrake applied, before the gear
selector can be moved from P (Park) to R
(Reverse). The selector can be moved into
P with the ignition off.
Sports mode
When the gear selector is moved from D
(Drive) to S (Sport) automatic changing of
the gears is maintained. However, the
gear shift points are modified to make full
use of the engine’s power.
Note: With the selector lever in S, and DS
displayed in the message centre, the
transmission will enter 6th gear less often
at higher cruising speeds.
Fuel consumption will be adversely
affected.
Manual operation
Manual changing of the gears via the
steering wheel paddles is possible when
the gear selector is in either D (Drive) or S
(Sport).
JAG0440L
JAG0441G

20
Quick Start
L
Operation of the paddles whilst in D will
temporarily select manual gear selection
mode. This will be automatically
cancelled after a short period of driving at
a steady speed, or can be cancelled by
holding the (+) paddle for approximately
one second.
Operation of the paddles in S will
permanently select manual gear
selection. Once selected, it will only be
cancelled if the gear selector is moved
into D.
•To shift down, briefly pull the
(-) paddle.
•To shift up, briefly pull the (+) paddle.
PARKING ASSIST
When R (Reverse) is selected, the
Touch-screen displays a representation
of the vehicle, and indicates any
obstruction which is detected to the front
or rear of the vehicle.
If an obstruction is detected, a coloured
bar will be displayed showing it’s
approximate distance from the vehicle.
This will be accompanied by an audible
alert that increases frequency as the
object is approached.
The volume of the alert can be changed
via the Vehicle - Parking settings on the
Touch-screen.
Parking assist is automatically cancelled
when D (Drive) is selected, and the vehicle
speed exceeds 15 km/h (9 mph).
Parking assist care points
Sensors may activate when water, snow,
or ice, are detected on the surface of the
sensors. This is normal for such sensors,
and regular cleaning will maintain
performance.
JAG0442G
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
Valet
12 : 26 pm
Parking Aid Alert
JAG0265NAS

21
Quick Start
R
Parking assist may sound if it detects a
frequency range close to that of the
sensors (e.g. motorcycles, or air brakes).
CRUISE (SPEED) CONTROL
Speed control is the standard cruise
control system which enables the vehicle
to maintain a set road speed until either
cruise control is cancelled, or the brake
pedal is applied.
The system is controlled via switches on
the steering wheel:
1. (+) or (-) to set the road speed to be
maintained, or increase/decrease the
speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when
cruise control is operating.
2. CANCEL - cancels cruise control, but
retains the set speed in the memory.
3. RESUME - to resume a set speed
retained in the memory.
Note: Cruise control will automatically
disengage when the brake pedal is
applied, or when the vehicle speed falls
below 30 km/h (18 mph).
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC)
!WARNING:
Adaptive cruise control is not a
collision avoidance system
Adaptive cruise control is designed to aid
the driver maintain a gap to the vehicle
ahead, or to maintain a SET road speed if
there is no slower vehicle ahead.
The system is controlled via switches on
the steering wheel:
1. (+) or (-)to set the road speed to be
maintained, or increase/decrease the
speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) steps when
cruise control is operating.
2. GAP - increase/decrease the time gap
to the vehicle ahead.
3. CANCEL - cancels cruise control, but
retains the set speed in the memory.
4. RESUME - to resume a set speed
retained in the memory.
The gap to the vehicle ahead can be
changed to one of four pre-defined
intervals. The current setting will be
displayed in the message centre.
JAG0035G
1
23
JAG0274G
2
34
1

22
Quick Start
L
If a slower vehicle is
encountered or enters the
same lane as you, the road
speed will be adjusted to maintain the
currently selected time gap. The warning
light will illuminate to indicate that the
vehicle is in follow mode.
Note: The system will not detect:
•
Stationary, or slow moving vehicles
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
•
Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
•
Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
TOUCH-SCREEN
The Touch-screen allows control of the
audio, climate, phone, and navigation
systems. The screen only requires a light
touch to operate functions. Excessive
pressure on the screen can result in
damage to the screen.
1. Touch-screen. When initially
activated, the Touch-screen will
display the Home screen.
2. Touch-screen On/Off. Press to turn
the screen on.
Press to put the Touch-screen into
screen saver mode, press again to
turn off the screen.
3. Home screen button. Press at any
time to return to the Home screen.
Most screens feature a return icon
in the bottom right-hand corner.
Touch this icon to return to the
previous screen.
SOUND SETTINGS
General operation
Press the control knob to switch on/off,
and rotate to adjust volume.
Press the SOURCE button repeatedly to
scroll through FM1, FM2, AM, and CD
options.
Steering wheel controls
1. Rotate up or down to increase or
decrease volume.
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Valet
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
JAG0444NAS
32
1
JAG0445G
JAG0034G
1 2
4 3

23
Quick Start
R
2. Rotate up or down to scroll through
preset radio stations or CD tracks.
Holding the wheel in the up or down
position for two seconds will seek
forward or backwards to the next
available signal.
3. Press repeatedly to scroll through
FM1, FM2, AM, and CD options.
4. Press to mute the audio unit. This
button is also used in phone mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Caution: Ensure that the audio system
is turned OFF so that the aerial is
retracted before using an automatic
car wash. Allow time for the aerial to
retract.
From the Audio control screen, touch the
AM/FM tab to select radio. Subsequent
touches of this icon will scroll through the
available wavebands.
Storing stations
Touch Autostore to automatically store
the nine strongest signals.
To manually store a station, search for the
station using the seek icons 1. Once the
station has been found, touch and hold
one of the station icons 2 to store the
station. An alert tone sounds to indicate
that the station has been stored.
The audio system has additional features
which include: FM text, Traffic
Announcements (TA), Programme Type
(PTY), Regionalisation (REG), and
Extended Other Networks (EON).
CD OPERATION
From the Audio control screen, touch the
CD icon to access the CD player control
screen. The CD player has an integral
6-disc multi changer. The example
illustrated shows the multi changer
loaded with four CD’s, with one disc
playing.
Loading CDs
Insert a CD into the slot label side up, a
CD loading message is displayed. Press
and hold the LOAD button, and follow the
on-screen instructions. Continue to load
CDs until the player is full, or you have
inserted the desired number.
To eject the selected CD, press the eject
button. Press and hold to eject each CD in
turn.
AM
AM
/
FM
FM
CD
TV
--
Autostore
Settings
Audio
2
JAG0446NAS
12 : 26 pm
1
PTY 3CH
AM 770 WABC
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
WCBS
CD
Tr 15 03:25
DPLII
Folders
Settings
Audio
AM
/
FM
CD
1234 56
Mix Repeat
JAG0447NAS
12 : 26 pm
4
1
3
256

24
Quick Start
L
Playing a CD
1. To play a CD touch the icon for the
required CD number.
2.
To pause play press the pause icon, a
further press will continue playback.
3.
Touch and release the skip forward
icon to advance to the beginning of
the next track. Touch and hold to
advance through the current track,
and subsequent tracks, until the icon
is released.
4.
Touch and release the skip back icon
to return to the previous track. Touch
and hold to move back through the
current track, and subsequent tracks,
until the icon is released.
5. Touch and release Mix to randomly
play tracks from the selected CD.
Touch and hold for two seconds to
play tracks randomly from all loaded
CDs.
6. Touch and release Repeat to play the
selected track again. Touch and hold
for two seconds to play the entire disc
again.
NAVIGATION
The Navigation system features include:
Compass, Points of Interest, Memory
Points, Split screen, Previous destination,
and Route preferences. For details of
these features refer to the Navigation
Handbook.
Setting a destination
To set a destination and start using the
system:
1. Select Navigation from the home
screen, and when prompted touch
Agree to access the initial map
screen.
2. Touch Menu to access the navigation
menu, then touch Destination Entry.
If the map is displayed, select Menu
to access the Destination Entry.
3. Touch Address or Postcode.
JAG0453NAS
OXFORD
OXFORD
M 4 0
Menu
12 : 26 pm
Stored
Destination
Auto Voice
Entry
Guidance Off
Locations
Navigation
Setup
Route
Options
JAG0454NAS
Delete
,()OK
QWER T YU I O P
AS DF GHJ KL
ZXCV BNM
12 : 26 pm
1T
23456 7 89 0
Input Zip code
Zip code

25
Quick Start
R
4. Enter the Town, Address, and
House Number, using the on-screen
keypad. Select the Display Map
button and then select Destination.
For post code entry, enter the post
code.
Select OK to enter.
5. Select Destination to confirm.
6. Once calculated, the screen displays
Route 1. To view and select
alternative routes, touch the 3 Route
icon.
7. Touch Start to commence navigation.
Drive away following the voice
guidance.
Touch the audible repeat icon to hear the
last voice instruction again. To mute voice
guidance, go to the navigation Menu
screen or, if the map is displayed, select
Menu. Then select Auto Voice Guidance
Off or On by touching the blue bar.
Upon arrival at your destination an audio
announcement, and on-screen message
will confirm your arrival.
Cancelling guidance
To cancel guidance go to Menu, Route
Options, Cancel Guidance.
TELEPHONE - BLUETOOTH
SYSTEM
cell phones with Bluetooth capability can
communicate with the vehicle’s inbuilt
telephone system.
The following procedure demonstrates
how to connect the most popular brands
of cell phone.
Paring And Docking A Handset
1. Enable the cell phone’s Bluetooth
function. Refer to the handset
manufacturer’s instructions for
guidance.
2. Select Phone from the Home screen.
3. If no phones have been Paired, No
phone found will be displayed. Touch
Yes to confirm a new phone search.
The system will then search for
Bluetooth enabled handsets in the
vicinity.
WASHINGTON
WASHINGTON
DELAWARE
DELAWARE
PHILADELPHIA
PHILADELPHIA
110 mi
Menu
N Beechwood Street
4
mi
NQuick
JAG0455NAS
12 : 26 pm
Phone
12 : 26 pm
Vertu Ascent
Nokia 623
Pair & dock
Delete
Not
Paired
Phone
Cancel
To pair & dock phone
Enter (5616) on handset
JAG0451NAS

26
Quick Start
L
4. Once the system has recognised the
handset, the name of the phone will
appear on the phone list. Touch the
Pair & Dock icon.
5. The screen will display a random
four-digit code. Enter the code to the
handset and follow any instructions
displayed on the handset.
When the handset has been successfully
docked to the system, the Digit Dial
screen is displayed.
Downloading phonebook entries
1. Select Phone from the Home screen.
2. Touch Settings, then select Phone
Options.
3. Select Phonebook from the Menu.
4. Ensure that Auto Download is on. All
the numbers in your cell phone will be
transferred to the vehicle’s system the
next time that the phone is connected
to the system.
Making a call
1. With a paired and docked handset,
select Phone from the Home screen.
2. From the Digit Dial screen, enter the
number using the on-screen keypad.
3.
Touch the phone icon on the screen,
or the call button on the steering
wheel control.
The call duration will appear on the
Touch-screen.
Receiving A Call
To answer or end a call touch Accept on
the screen, or press the call button on the
steering wheel control.
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
Options
C
12 : 26 pm
01926648100
JAG0452NAS
JAG0450G

27
Filling Station Information
R
Filling Sta tion Inform ation
FUEL TYPE
Unleaded 91 Octane
Caution: This vehicle is not suitable for
use with fuels containing more than 10
per cent ethanol. Do not use E85 fuels
(85 per cent ethanol content).
Equipment necessary for the use of
fuels containing more than 10 per cent
ethanol is not fitted to this vehicle. If
E85 fuels are used, serious engine and
fuel system damage will occur.
Fuel filling
Press the fuel filler flap release, located on
the driver’s knee bolster switchpack
below the facia, see ‘FUEL FILLER FLAP’,
page 52.
The filler flap is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
When refuelling, ensure that the fuel
nozzle rests on the bottom of the filler
neck.
Refit the fuel filler cap by twisting the filler
cap clockwise until it clicks. Close the
flap, which automatically locks shut.
Incorrect replacement of the fuel filler cap
may result in check engine warning
indicator (malfunction warning indicator,
MIL) illuminating.
JAG0051L
AVE FUEL
A
MPG
JAG0054NAS

28
Filling Station Information
L
HOOD RELEASE
Pull the release lever located below the
facia on the left-hand side of the vehicle,
see 234.
UNDERHOOD TOP-UP
Recommended engine oil.
Castrol 5W-30 to Jaguar specification
WSS M2C913 - A or B, see page 237.
Windshield and headlamp washer
reservoir.
See page 239.
Coolant system
50% water 50% antifreeze, see page 238.
TIRE PRESSURES
Tire pressure label USA only
The recommended tire pressures for all
normal operating conditions, are shown
on a label fixed to the pillar behind the
driver’s door.
Canada and Mexico only: The
recommended tire pressures for all
normal operating conditions, are shown
on a label fixed to the end of the driver’s
door.
For your convenience you may wish to
record the tire pressures in the boxes
provided below. If you are unsure of the
correct pressures, please contact your
Jaguar Dealer.
JAG0056G
JAG0059N
JAG0057G

29
Filling Station Information
R
!WARNING:
When using tires other than those
recommended by Jaguar, do not
exceed the speed capacity
recommended by the manufacturer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), see page 267, monitors the
pressures of the tires, providing a warning
of low tire pressure.
If a warning appears one, or more, of your
tires are significantly under-inflated. You
should stop and check your tire pressures
as soon as possible. They should be
inflated to the recommended pressure. If
warnings appear repeatedly, the cause
must be investigated and rectified.
Check pressures when the tires are cold.
Deflating a warm tire to the recommended
cold inflation pressure, will result in
dangerous under-inflation.
ULTRA HIGH PERFORMANCE
TIRES
Caution: Ultra high performance tires.
This vehicle is equipped with an Ultra
High Performance (UHP) tire and wheel
combination designed to give
maximum dry road performance with
consideration for aquaplaning
resistance. UHP tires have
performance enhancing soft rubber
tread compound. If driven aggressively
they may suffer rapid tread wear and a
shorter life than can be expected from
other tire types. This wheel and tire
combination is more susceptible to
damage from road hazards.
Do not use this combination for driving
on snow or ice. High perfromance tires
must be replaced with winter tires
when weather conditions dictate.
Tires with an all season icon and or
M+S marking have a level of winter
performance and need not be
replaced.
FRONT
Normal Driving
Laden/High Speed
REAR
Normal Driving
Laden/High Speed
Spare Wheel
AVE FUEL
A
MPG
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
JAG0060NAS

Introduction
30
L
Chapter 1
HEALTH AND SAFETY
!WARNING:
California Proposition 65:
Engine exhaust, some of its
constituents and certain vehicle
components, contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in
vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
Warnings, cautions and notes
Take particular note of WARNINGS,
Cautions and Notes given throughout this
handbook.
!WARNING:
Warnings are displayed in this
handbook to help avoid the risk of
personal injury.
Caution: Cautions are displayed in this
handbook to reduce the possibility of
damage to the vehicle.
Note: Notes are used to help avoid
difficulties in the operation of the vehicle.
Warning symbols on the vehicle
Caution: Do not remove any warning
labels from the vehicle.
These symbols advise you to read the
handbook before touching this part of the
vehicle or attempting adjustments of any
kind.
JAG0063G

31
Introduction
R
Label locations
Shown below are the main locations that
contain vehicle warning and information
labels:
1. Vehicle certification.
Air bag.
Child restraint.
Tire placard.
2. Air conditioning.
Emissions.
3. Under hood warnings.
4. Coolant warnings.
5. Fuel warnings.
6. Battery.
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
!WARNING:
Do not fit unapproved accessories or
conversions, as they could affect the
safety of the vehicle.
Jaguar Cars Limited will not accept any
liability for death, personal injury or
damage to property which may occur
as a direct result of fitment of
non-approved conversions to Jaguar
vehicles.
Jaguar Cars Limited strongly advise
against making any modifications to
the suspension or steering systems.
This could seriously affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle leading to
loss of control or roll-over.
The use of non-genuine parts and
accessories may invalidate the vehicle
warranty.
Genuine Jaguar parts and accessories
Your Jaguar Dealer can supply you with
genuine replacement parts and
accessories which are fully approved to
Jaguar’s original equipment specification.
Electrical accessories
!WARNING:
Alterations to the electrical system,
including the fitting of accessories not
designed for this Jaguar, will cause
damage to the electrical systems. This
could result in a malfunction or fire. All
accessory work should be entrusted to
a Jaguar Dealer.
JAG0560G
1
2
6
1
2
3
5
4

Introduction
32
L
Ground points
Caution: Under no circumstances must
holes be drilled in the bodywork to
accept ground terminals.
If an accessory needs to be connected to
a ground point, it is advisable to consult a
Jaguar Dealer.
DATA RECORDING
Service data recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information
about the performance or status of
various systems and modules in the
vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering
or brake systems.
In order to properly diagnose and service
your vehicle, Jaguar Cars Limited and
service and repair facilities may access
vehicle diagnostic information through a
direct connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Event data recording
Other modules in your vehicle - event data
recorders - are capable of collecting and
storing data during a crash or near crash
event. The recorded information may
assist in the investigation of such an
event. The modules may record
information about both the vehicle and
the occupants, potentially including
information such as:
•How various systems in your vehicle
were operating.
•Whether or not the driver and
passenger seat belts were buckled.
•How far, if at all, the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal.
•How fast the vehicle was travelling.
•Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
To access this information special
equipment must be directly connected to
the recording modules. Jaguar Cars
Limited do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or third parties
acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the
information independently of Jaguar Cars
Limited.

33
Reporting Safety Defects
R
Reporting Safety Defects
Vehicle defects (U.S. Only)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Jaguar Cars.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between
you, your Dealer, or Jaguar Cars.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator,
NHTSA,
400 Seventh Street SW.,
Washington, DC. 20590.
To contact Jaguar Cars, call 1–800 4
Jaguar.
You can also obtain other information
about motor safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Vehicle defects (Canada only)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada in
addition to notifying Jaguar Cars.
To contact Transport Canada, call their
toll-free number 1-800-333-0510.

Keys and Remote Controls
34
L
Keys and Remote Con trols
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The security system and entry to the
vehicle are controlled by the Jaguar
Smart Key. Both doors and the luggage
compartment can be locked and
unlocked using the remote control
buttons.
Keyless Entry is an enhancement of the
Jaguar Smart Key. It allows entry to the
vehicle without any button pressing.
Full security integrity of the vehicle is still
maintained, see Keyless Entry page 41.
The remote control also allows the vehicle
to be started without the use of an ignition
key - Keyless Starting, see page 50.
Two handsets, comprising of a
transmitter body with a detachable metal
emergency key blade are supplied.
Separate emergency key blades are
available from Jaguar Dealers.
Caution:
•Remove all remote controls from
the vehicle when it is left
unattended. This will ensure the
vehicle is left in a secure condition.
•If a remote control is lost, a
replacement can be obtained and
programmed to the vehicle by a
Jaguar Dealer. Notify a Jaguar
Dealer as soon as a remote control
is lost or stolen and have the
remaining remote control(s)
reprogrammed.
The emergency key blade number is
recorded on an attached label. Peel off
the label and attach it to the designated
area on the Security Card supplied in the
vehicle literature pack. Keep the Security
Card safe, but not in the vehicle.
JAG0064G

35
Keys and Remote Controls
R
USING THE REMOTE CONTROL
The remote handset,Jaguar Smart Key,
allows the vehicle to be unlocked and the
engine to be started without the use of an
ignition key - Keyless Starting, see page
50.
1. Unlocks and disarms the vehicle.
Central unlocking
One press: Unlocks all doors
and the luggage compartment.
The direction indicators will flash twice.
Two stage unlocking
One press: Unlocks the driver’s door and
the luggage compartment. The direction
indicators will flash twice (in certain
markets two audible warnings will be
emitted).
Two presses (within three seconds):
Unlocks the passenger door.
Note: Changing from central locking to
two stage locking and back again can be
carried out by pressing the lock and
unlock buttons simultaneously for four
seconds or via the touch-screen, see
page 46. The directional indicators will
flash twice to confirm that the change has
been carried out.
Press and hold the button to globally
open the vehicle windows, if enabled, see
page 47. Press and hold opens all
windows as well as the programmed door
opening.
2. Locks and arms the vehicle.
First press (if vehicle is
unlocked and disarmed:
Locks all doors, luggage
compartment and sets the alarm system.
The direction indicators will flash once.
3. Releases the luggage compartment
lock.
When the vehicle alarm system
is armed and the luggage
compartment only is opened,
the door and hood security is still active.
The doors will remain locked and armed.
See page 43.
4. Activates the convenience headlamp
feature.
One press switches on
headlamps. The headlamps will
remain on for 25 seconds, or
until the button is pressed again, or until
the engine START/STOP button is
pressed.
JAG0065G
4 3 2
1
7
6
5

Keys and Remote Controls
36
L
5. Activates the panic alarm.
Press the button three times
within three seconds.
The alarm is stopped by:
•Pressing the button again three times
within three seconds.
•Inserting the Jaguar Smart Key into
the starter control unit, see page 37.
•The vehicle detecting a valid Jaguar
Smart Key when the START/STOP
button is pressed.
Note: The panic alarm cannot be
cancelled within the first 5 seconds of the
alarm activating.
6. Emergency key blade.
To use the emergency key blade see
page 45.
7. Emergency key blade release button.
To extract: press the release button and
hold while withdrawing the key blade.
To insert: press and hold the button and
push the key blade into the Jaguar Smart
Key transmitter housing.
To extract: press the release button and
hold while withdrawing the key blade.
The key blade operates the door lock on
the left-hand side of the vehicle, the
luggage compartment lock and glove
compartment lock, see page 45.
Care of the remote handset
Do not expose to extremes of heat, dust,
humidity or allow contact with fluids. Do
not leave the transmitter exposed to
direct sunlight.
JAG0075G

37
Keys and Remote Controls
R
Irregular remote control operation
If difficulty is experienced with remote
keyless entry, passive entry, passive
starting or Jaguar Smart Key operation, it
may be caused by:
•internal battery low voltage and
therefore the battery should be
replaced, see page 40, or
•high levels of localised external
electrical interference e.g. radio
transmitter.
Until the battery can be replaced, or until
the vehicle is outside the local electrical
interference zone, the Jaguar Smart Key
must be inserted into the starter control
unit.
1. Lift the lid of the centre console
stowage compartment.
2. Slide open the cover of the starter
control unit.
3. Insert the Jaguar Smart Key into the
recess with the emergency key
release button facing forward.
To remove the Jaguar Smart Key from the
starter control unit:
1. Ensure that the vehicle is at rest with
the gear selector in the P position and
the engine not running.
2. Carefully depress the Jaguar Smart
Key and release. The key will eject into
its rest position.
3. Remove the Jaguar Smart Key from
the starter control unit.
Note: This is not a Jaguar Smart Key
internal battery recharging procedure. The
battery is non-rechargeable.
1
JAG0066G
2
3
1
3
2
JAG0061G

Keys and Remote Controls
38
L
Message centre information displays
Message Warning
Light
Priority
Indicator
Meaning
SMART KEY NOT
FOUND, PLEASE
INSERT IN SLOT
None None The Jaguar Smart Key has not
been detected, insert into the
starter control unit, see page 37.
CHECK SMART KEY None None Check that the Jaguar Smart Key
is in the vehicle.
WRONG SMART KEY
FOUND
None None The Jaguar Smart Key detected
by the in-vehicle systems is not
the one belonging to the vehicle.
REMOVE SMART KEY None None Remove the Jaguar Smart Key
from the starter control unit.

39
Keys and Remote Controls
R
Jaguar Smart Key system transmitters
!WARNING:
Any person fitted with an implanted
pacemaker should ensure that the
pacemaker is kept at a distance of at
least 22 cm (8.7 inches) away from any
transmitter mounted in the vehicle.
This is to avoid any possibility of
interference between the system and
pacemaker.
1. Cabin front transmitter.
2. Keyless vehicle module.
3. Cabin rear transmitter.
4. Exterior door handle transmitters.
5. Luggage compartment interior
transmitter.
6. Luggage compartment exterior
transmitter.
JAG0543G
5
6
5
6
1
2
2
1
4
4
4
3
3

Keys and Remote Controls
40
L
CHANGING THE REMOTE
CONTROL BATTERY
Battery renewal
When the battery needs renewing there
will be a significant decrease in the
effective range of the key transmitter and
the message SMART KEY BATTERY
LOW is displayed on the message centre.
To renew the battery, follow the
procedure below:
1. Remove the key blade from the
Jaguar Smart Key, see page 36.
2. Remove the two side covers, one at a
time, by inserting a small, flat blade,
screwdriver between the cover and
body and lightly twist the screwdriver.
3. Insert a small, flat bladed, screwdriver
between the two body halves of the
remote control. Apply light pressure
to the screwdriver and separate the
two halves.
4. Remove the printed circuit board,
taking care not to touch the battery
terminals. Remove the old battery and
dispose of it safely.
5. Fit a new battery cell, type CR2032
(available from your Jaguar Dealer),
with the side marked with the positive
symbol (+) downwards in the battery
receptacle. Avoid touching the new
battery as moisture/oil from the
fingers can reduce the life of the
battery and corrode the contacts.
Refit the parts in the reverse order
ensuring that they click securely into
place.
JAG0555G
2
3
5
2
4
1

41
Locks
R
Locks
KEYLESS ENTRY
The Keyless Entry function operates in
the following manner:
Central locking:
1. As a door handle is operated, the
vehicle emits a search signal.
2. As long as the Jaguar Smart Key is
within approximately 1.0m (3 feet 3
inches) of the operated door handle,
the signal will be acknowledged.
Note: The Jaguar Smart Key requires
only to be on the driver’s person or in
a bag or a non-metallic briefcase; it
does not require to be exposed or
handled.
3. The vehicle accepts the valid
response and allows access via either
door. The direction indicators will
flash twice (in certain markets two
audible warnings will be emitted).
Note: You are unlikely to notice a
time lag during this momentary
process.
Two stage unlocking: Access to the
vehicle is via the first door handle
operated. The other door can be opened
by releasing the internal door lock or via
operating the exterior door handle with a
Jaguar Smart Key present.
Note: Changing from central locking to
two stage locking and back again can be
simply carried out by pressing the lock
and unlock buttons simultaneously for
four seconds. The directional indicators
will flash twice to confirm the change.
Jaguar Smart Key check
When the last open door is closed, the
vehicle will perform a search of the vehicle
interior for the Jaguar Smart Key. If one is
not found a message SMART KEY NOT
FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN SLOT will
be displayed for four seconds on the
message centre. This is to alert the driver
that the Jaguar Smart Key may have been
inadvertently removed from the vehicle.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
!WARNING:
The door windows partially lower and
raise automatically when the door is
opened and closed. Keep fingers away
from the windows when closing the
door. Closing an electrically operated
window on fingers, hands or any
vulnerable part of the body, can result
in serious injury.
Note: It will not be possible to lock the
vehicle if any door, hood or luggage
compartment is ajar or the inertia switch
has been tripped, see page 223. An
audible warning will be emitted.
JAG0068G

Locks
42
L
Convenience Mode
As the door is opened, the vehicle’s
electrical system initiates the
convenience mode. The following
systems become functional:
•memory
•seat and steering column adjustment
•interior and exterior lighting
•message centre
•cigar lighter and power socket.
Door external lock operation - with
Keyless Entry
Note: The keyless locking system will only
activate if the remote handset is outside
the vehicle.
To lock the vehicle and set alarm
1. Press the button on the door handle
once, or;
2. Use the Jaguar Smart Key.
Note: The vehicle will not lock
automatically.
Anti-slam locking
This feature helps prevent locking the
remote handset in the vehicle.
If either the driver’s or passenger’s door is
open and an attempt is made to lock the
doors using the interior locking levers, the
doors will not lock, due to a mechanical
inhibitor.
The vehicle can be locked using the
touch-screen lock, the remote handset
(when outside the vehicle) when all the
doors are closed.
Door external lock operation - without
Keyless Entry
Press the remote control lock button 1 or
use the emergency key blade 2, see page
45.
JAG0069L
JAG0520G
1
2

43
Locks
R
Door interior lock operation
To lock: Press the door release lever
inwards to lock both doors and luggage
compartment.
To unlock: Pull the door release lever.
Drive-away door locking
This feature locks all the doors and
luggage compartment if they are
unlocked when the gear selector is
moved out of the P position and the
vehicle is moving forward at the set speed
of above 7 km/h (5 mph).
Drive-away locking can be disabled or
reinstated by use of the touch-screen, if
required, see page 46.
Luggage compartment locking and
unlocking
All vehicles
The luggage compartment can be opened
by:
•Pressing the luggage compartment
release switch 1 on the facia
switchpack.
•Pressing the luggage compartment
release button 2 on the remote
handset.
Note: If the vehicle is armed the alarm
will not activate, but will re-arm when
the luggage compartment lid is closed
again.
•With the vehicle unlocked, press the
release button 3 on the luggage
compartment lid. However, it will be
inhibited if the valet mode is set.
JAG0071L
JAG0073L
1
2
34

Locks
44
L
•The key blade can be used to open
the luggage compartment release
lock 4, located behind the number
plate, but this will cause the alarm to
sound.
Caution: If the luggage compartment is
opened after the driver and passenger
doors are locked, ensure the Jaguar
Smart Key remains outside the vehicle
when it is closed again.
Vehicles without Keyless Entry
If the Jaguar Smart Key is inadvertently
left inside the vehicle, you will be locked
out. You should contact your Jaguar
Dealer.
Vehicles with Keyless Entry
Caution: If the Jaguar Smart Key is
inadvertently left inside the vehicle, an
audible alarm will sound and the
luggage compartment lid will re-open
after three seconds.
Note: If the Jaguar Smart Key is placed in
a metal container, it will not be detected.
All Jaguar Smart Keys must be removed
from the vehicle before locking.
Luggage compartment emergency
release
Your vehicle is equipped with a
mechanical interior luggage compartment
release handle that provides a means of
escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the
luggage compartment.
Adults are advised to familiarise
themselves with the operation and
location of the release handle.
The T-shaped handle is located on the
luggage compartment lid, coupe 1 and
convertible 2.
To open the luggage compartment lid
from the inside, pull the T-shaped handle
and push up the lid. The material that the
handle is made of will glow for hours in the
darkness of the luggage compartment
following brief exposure to ambient light.
JAG0062N
1
2

45
Locks
R
Ensure that the T-shaped handle is firmly
returned to its stowed position after use.
!WARNING:
•Keep vehicle doors and the luggage
compartment locked and keep keys
out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised
children could lock themselves in
an open compartment and risk
injury. Children should be taught
not to play in vehicle.
•On hot days, the temperature in the
luggage compartment and the
vehicle interior can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures
for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at
risk.
Emergency key blade operation
Remove the left-hand door handle key
lock cover by inserting the key blade into
the rectangular hole on the underside of
the cover.
Push up and twist the key blade to release
the cover retaining clips. Insert the key
blade into the exposed lock.
Note: Ensure that the emergency key
blade is kept safely at all times.
To lock the vehicle
Turn the key blade towards the front of
the vehicle and release.
This will lock the doors and the luggage
compartment, but will not arm the vehicle.
Unlocking
To unlock the vehicle
Turn the key blade towards the rear of the
vehicle and release. This unlocks the
left-hand side door and the luggage
compartment and turns on the interior
lights for two minutes at ¾ brightness.
When the vehicle is unlocked in this
manner, and a door is opened, this will
activate the full alarm. To disarm the
vehicle, press the Jaguar Smart Key
unlock button or stow it in the starter
control unit, see page 37, or press the
engine START/STOP button.
The direction indicators give two flashes
(in certain markets two audible warnings
will be given).
Valet mode
Valet mode allows the vehicle to be
parked by a parking attendant who can
lock the vehicle after parking, but cannot
open the luggage or glove compartments.
The key blade is used to lock the glove
compartment. The touch-screen sets the
valet mode for securing the luggage
compartment, see PROGRAMMING THE
REMOTE CONTROL on page -46.
JAG0076G

Locks
46
L
PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE
CONTROL
The remote handset, Jaguar Smart Key,
and various features of the vehicle
security system can be programmed to
your individual requirements by use of the
touch-screen.
The programmable features are as
follows:
•drive-away locking
•central or two stage locking
•sensor override
•window global open or close, passive
entry vehicles only
•valet key mode.
Selecting drive-away locking
From the main Home touch-screen
menu, select Vehicle:
1. Select Veh. settings.
2. The Security button is selected
automatically as the default.
3. Scroll down to - Drive away locking -
and select either On or Off.
Vehicle
Security
Parking
Valet mode
2 stage unlock Off On
Intrusion/tilt Off On
Vehicle
Security
Parking
Valet mode
Off On
Global close Off On
Off On
Global open
Drive away
locking
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0526NAS

47
Locks
R
Selecting central or two stage locking
From the main Home touch-screen
menu, select Vehicle:
1. Select Veh. settings.
2. The Security button is selected
automatically as the default.
3. Select: - 2 stage unlock - On or Off.
Valet mode
From the main Home touch-screen
menu, select Vehicle:
1. Select Veh. settings.
2. The Security button is selected
automatically as the default.
3. Select Valet mode.
4. Enter a four digit Personal
Identification Number (PIN)
(personally chosen) by touching the
digit screen pad. On completion
touch the OK button. The screen
indicates that the PIN has been
accepted by displaying Valet on. If
you wish to cancel the PIN, touch the
C button at any time during entering
the number.
•Using the key blade, lock the glove
box.
•The luggage compartment is now
securely locked in the valet mode.
•On exiting and securing the vehicle,
hand the Jaguar Smert Key, less the
key blade, to the attendant.
Note: Ensure that the emergency key
blade is kept safely at all times.
De-selecting valet mode: When entry
into the vehicle has been gained, access
the Valet mode screen.
Vehicle
Security
Parking
Valet mode
2 stage unlock Off On
Intrusion/tilt Off On
12 : 26 pm
JAG0525NAS
Valet off - enter pin
Vehicle
Security
Parking
Valet mode
12 3
45 6
78 9
0
C
OK
12 : 26 pm
JAG0079NAS

Locks
48
L
1. Enter your four digit PIN and touch the
OK button. The screen will indicate
that your PIN has been accepted by
displaying Valet off.
2. The luggage compartment will return
to the previously set security
requirement.
3. Unlock the glove box using the key
blade.
4. Insert the key blade into the Jaguar
Smart Key.
Note: If the PIN number has been
forgotten, the luggage compartment can
be unlocked by using the key blade in the
luggage compartment lock. This will
cancel the valet mode, see page 43.
Valet on - enter pin
Vehicle
Security
Parking
Valet mode
12 3
45 6
78 9
0
C
OK
12 : 26 pm
JAG0080NAS

49
Alarm
R
Alarm
ARMING THE ALARM
Some items may not be available, contact
your Jaguar Dealer if you are unsure.
Passive arming of the automatic alarm
system, can be programmed by a Jaguar
Dealer. This ensures that the security
system arms itself 30 seconds after the
doors, hood and luggage compartment
are closed following removal of the
remote handset from the vehicle.
Standard alarm features cover the
perimeter sensing of hood, doors and
luggage compartment.
Note: Passive arming does not lock the
doors.
Alarms and audible signals
Note: In certain markets, legislation
prohibits the use of audible confirmation
signals.
Audible signals
Two audible warnings (error signal) will
sound if an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle if a door, hood or luggage
compartment is not fully closed.
Full alarm
Once armed, any of the following
circumstances will create a full alarm
state, sound the siren or horns and flash
the direction indicators:
•opening a door, luggage
compartment (except with remote
handset) or hood
•using a remote handset in the starter
control unit which is not programmed
to the vehicle.
Remote headlight convenience
By pressing the remote handset
transmitter button with the dipped
headlight symbol once, the headlights will
come on for 25 seconds, unless the
headlight button is pressed again, or if the
engine START/STOP button key pressed.
DISARMING THE ALARM
Using the remote control
See page 35 and 41.
Using the key blade
See page 45.
PANIC ALARM
When in or near the vehicle, the panic
alarm can be set off to deter a possible
offender.
Pressing the panic button on the remote
handset transmitter three times within
three seconds will activate the panic
alarm.
The alarm is stopped by inserting the
remote handset in the starter control unit
or by pressing the panic button on the key
transmitter three times within three
seconds or holding the panic button
down for three seconds.
Note: The panic alarm is not functional if
the ignition system is ON.
JAG0081G

Starting the Engine
50
L
Chapter 2
KEYLESS STARTING
!WARNING:
Before starting the engine, check the
parkbrake is ON and the gear selector
is in position P.
With the brake pedal depressed, press
the START/STOP button to start the
engine. All systems will become
functional.
Note: If the fuel system inertia switch has
been tripped, the ignition system will be
isolated, see page 223.
If the engine persistently fails to start,
press the START/STOP button to turn the
ignition system back to convenience
mode. Slowly depress the accelerator
pedal fully, hold it in this position and
press the START/STOP button with the
brake pedal applied, the engine will start
to crank. Release the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.
Note: If the Jaguar Smart Key is placed in
the door pocket it will be outside the
range of the sensors when the door is
opened.
When pressing the engine START/STOP
button to start the engine, if the security
status light, on the top surface of the
instrument panel, remains flashing, a fault
condition is indicated. Seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.
Ignition system ON, non-engine start
To turn on the ignition system without
starting the engine, press the
START/STOP button without pressing the
brake pedal. All systems will become
functional.
Rolling re-start
If the engine is switched off while the
vehicle is moving, a rolling re-start can be
initiated by selecting neutral, N, and
pressing the engine START/STOP button.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
Caution: Never switch OFF the engine
whilst the vehicle is in motion.
With the gear selector in position P, press
the engine START/STOP button. The
engine will stop and the electrical system
will return to the convenience mode. The
audio, telephone and touch-screen
systems will revert to stand-by mode.
Pressing the START/STOP button again
will activate the systems.
JAG0503N

51
Engine Immobiliser
R
Engine Immobiliser
CODED KEYS
This vehicle is equipped with a Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS) which prevents
it from being driven away by an
unauthorised person.
A sophisticated decoding process is used
to validate the Jaguar Smart Key. The
engine can only be started by the key that
is programmed to the vehicle electronic
systems.

Driving Hints
56
L
Driving Hin ts
RUNNING-IN
Apart from a few precautionary
recommendations, there are no strict
running-in procedures for this vehicle.
By observing the following advisory
precautions you will ensure maximum
engine, transmission and brake life for
your vehicle:
Engine
•Allow the engine to reach operating
temperature before operating at
engine speeds over 3500 rev/min.
•Vary the speed frequently.
•From 1500 kilometres (940 miles)
onwards, gradually increase
performance of the vehicle up to the
permitted maximum speed.
Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of oil consumption is
normal. The rate of consumption will
depend on the following:
•The quality and viscosity of the oil.
•Climatic conditions.
•The speed at which the engine is
being operated.
•Road conditions.
Drivers should expect above normal
consumption when the engine is new, and
after running-in if high speeds are
sustained.
Brakes
To ensure that brake pads reach their
optimum wear and performance
condition, usually within 480 kilometres
(300 miles), observe the following points
are recommended.
•Where possible, avoid heavy braking
as this can result in damage to the
brake pads and discs.
•Avoid prolonged use of the brakes, for
example, when descending severe
gradients.
•Frequent light application of the
brakes is desirable. This helps to fully
bed-in the brake pads.
Final drive unit
During the first 1500 kilometers (940
miles):
•Avoid full throttle applications and do
not exceed 190 km/h (120 mph).
Observe the national speed limits in
the country in which you are travelling.
•Do not participate in motor racing
events, test track days, sports driving
schools or similar for the first 8000
kilometers (4975 miles), also see page
161.

Steering Wheel
62
L
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
!WARNING:
Do not adjust the steering wheel whilst
driving.
Caution: Do not use steering wheel
mounted security devices since
movement of the steering wheel in
entry or exit mode could result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g. the
windshield) or possible injury to the
occupant.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for tilt
and reach.
1. Turn the switch to the COLUMN or
AUTO position 1.
2. Move the switch forwards or
backwards to adjust reach.
3. Move the switch up or down to adjust
tilt.
Three steering wheel positions may be
stored and recalled by the driver position
memory system, refer to Memory Setting
on page 139.
The message centre will indicate which
switch position has been selected by
displaying the message COLUMN
ADJUST or COLUMN ADJUST AUTO.
Entry and exit mode
Entry and exit mode provides automatic
movement of the steering column to allow
easier entry to or exit from the vehicle.
Entry and exit mode is selected by setting
the steering column adjustment switch to
the AUTO position 2.
Exit: - If the ignition system is in the
convenience mode position and the
driver’s door is opened, the steering
column will move to the uppermost tilt
position, unless already in that position.
Entry: - When the door is closed and the
Start button is pressed, the steering
column will return to the previous
position.
Notes on entry and exit mode
operation
•If the steering column switch is moved
away from AUTO whilst the steering
column is tilted away, the steering
column will move back to its previous
position when the driver’s door is
closed and the Start button is
pressed.
•If the steering column is adjusted
during entry and exit operation,
steering column movement will stop.
JAG0040G

63
Steering Wheel
R
HORN
The dual tone horn is operated by
pressing the centre pad on the steering
wheel.
The horn also operates as a warning horn
if the vehicle alarm system is activated.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The heated steering wheel is activated via
the touch-screen main Home screen.
With the engine running, press the
steering wheel icon for heating either ON
or OFF.
The heated steering wheel can also be
activated via the Climate Control main
screen by pressing the steering wheel
icon for heating either ON or OFF while
the engine is running.
JAG0113G
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
TP
Valet
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
JAG0115NAS
Settings
Temp. sync.
External
62
F
Auto
Left Right
71 70
F .0 F
Auto
Econ
Climate
.5
Auto
Climate
12 : 26 pm
JAG0117NAS

Steering Wheel
64
L
AUDIO CONTROL
1. Increase or decrease volume.
2. Cycle through preset radio stations or
next CD track. A short press will seek
up or down to next preset station or
next CD track. Press and hold for two
seconds to select next strong radio
station or next CD.
3. Cycle through radio FM, AM and CD
changer. Press and hold for two
seconds to select Phone Ready
mode.
4. Select mute or answer phone call
when ringing.
CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise (speed) control system can be
used by the driver to maintain a selected
vehicle speed40 km/h (25 mph) for 2.5-
and 3.0-litre vehicles, and 28 km/h (18
mph) for 2.0-litre petrol and diesel
vehicles, without the driver having to use
the accelerator.
Controls on the steering wheel allow the
driver manual control of the system.
1. SPEED ADJUSTMENT CONTROL:
The thumb wheel is used to engage
cruise control initially. It is also used to
increase or decrease the set speed.
2. CANCEL: cancels cruise control but
retains the set speed in memory.
3. RESUME: engages cruise control
after it has been cancelled.
For more information about cruise
control, see page 169.
For information about adaptive cruise
control, see page 173.
JAG0034G
1 2
4 3
JAG0035G
1
23

65
Wipers and Washers
R
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
The windshield wipers and screen wash
functions are controlled by the right-hand
column stalk and only operate with the
ignition system ON.
Note:
•
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
screen.
•
In freezing or very hot conditions,
ensure that the blades are not stuck to
the glass.
•
In winter, remove any snow or ice from
around the arms and blades, including
the wiped area of the of the windshield
and the heater air intakes. If the wiper
blades have stuck to the glass, an
electronic cut-out may temporarily
prevent the wiper motor from
operating. If this occurs, switch OFF
the wiper and the ignition system.
Clear the obstruction and try again.
The stalk functions are as follows when
placed in the shown positions:
1. Windshield wipers off and parked.
2. Intermittent wipe.
3. Normal speed wipe.
4. Fast speed wipe.
5. Intermittent wipe rotary collar.
Intermittent wipe
When intermittent wipe 2 is selected, the
delay between wipes can be varied by
turning the rotary collar 5 to the required
delay position. Rain sensor wiper
operation is selected by turning the collar
to AUTO.
Note: If configured, the delay period for
each collar position (excluding AUTO),
automatically increases and decreases
with vehicle speed.
Flick wipe
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel
for a single wipe. Holding the column
switch in this position will operate the
wipers continuously at normal speed until
released.
JAG0050G
1
2
3
4
5
JAG0124G
JAG0123G

Wipers and Washers
66
L
Speed dependant mode
If speed dependant mode is configured,
the operation of all wiper modes will be
affected by the vehicle speed.
Speed dependant mode becomes active
when the wipers are operating and the
vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph). If
the vehicle subsequently becomes
stationary, the wiper automatically
change to the next lowest operating
speed. When the vehicle starts moving
again, the original wiper speed setting is
automatically restored.
Speed dependant mode can be
configured at your Jaguar Dealer.
RAIN SENSOR
Caution:
•Ensure that AUTO is not selected
when entering a car wash or
damage to the wiper blades or arms
can occur as they will operate in the
car wash.
•During frosty conditions ensure
that AUTO is not selected before
operating the ignition system as
damage to the wiper blades can
occur when the windshield is
frozen.
When AUTO (turn the rotary collar 5 to
AUTO) and intermittent wipe 2 are
selected, the wipers will automatically
operate when rain falls on to the
windshield, or when moisture is present.
For the wipers to operate, the ignition
system must be in the ON position.
Note: When starting a journey with a wet
windshield, the rain sensing wipers may
not operate immediately when the ignition
system is switched ON. Therefore, a flick
wipe should be used to clear the
windshield of any moisture.
Note: Some States require headlights to
be ON when wipers are in use.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
Windshield wiper blades – clean and
inspect
Grease, silicone and gasoline-based
products impair the blade’s wiping
capability.
Lift the wiper blades clear of the
windshield and wipe the blades with a
clean, soft cloth moistened with water to
which a mild liquid detergent has been
added.
If signs of hardness or cracking in the
rubber are found, or if the wipers leave
streaks or unwiped areas on the
windshield during use, then the wiper
blades should be replaced.
Note: The wiper arms have a restricted lift
of 10 degrees.
Use Jaguar Screen Clean Paste to
remove contamination from the
windshield to ensure effective wiping or if
smearing or juddering becomes evident.
A more aggressive cleaning agent may be
required to remove stubborn
contamination. You should contact a
Jaguar Dealer for advice.

67
Wipers and Washers
R
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Only fit replacement wiper blades that are
identical to the original specification.
Lift the locking tab to release the blade
assembly and slide the wipe assembly off
the end of the wiper arm. Carefully
replace the wiper arm assembly to its
stowed position.
To replace the wiper blade, position the
wiper arm into the aperture in the middle
of the new blade assembly and fully
locate the blade into the wiper arm. Push
the lock tab firmly into position so that the
wiper blade is locked into the wiper arm.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Program wash and wipe
Timed jet function: If timed jet function is
configured, the windshield washer jets
(located on the wiper arms) only spray on
the up stroke of the wiper arms. This
function can be configured at your Jaguar
Dealer.
With the stalk in the OFF or intermittent
position, the program wash and wipe
sequence is activated by pushing the
button on the end of the column switch.
Short press: The wipers will perform five
normal speed wipes, followed by a drip
wipe. The washer jets will spray on the
first two wipes.
Extended press: The wipers and
washers will operate continuously at
normal speed until the button is released.
When released, the wipers will complete
their current wipe and then complete
three further wipes, followed by a drip
wipe.
Drip wipe: If drip wipe is configured,
following completion of the program wash
and wipe cycles, the wipers will pause for
four seconds then complete a drip wipe to
clear any remaining drips from the
windshield.
This function can be configured at your
Jaguar Dealer.
JAG0461L
JAG0125G

Wipers and Washers
68
L
Washer
If normal or fast wipe is selected, pressing
the program wash and wipe button will
operate the washer jets.
•Short press: The washer jets spray for
two wipes.
•Extended press: The washer jets
spray until the button is released or a
10 second timer has elapsed.
Note: If the button is pressed during the
up-stroke of the wipers, the washer jets
may spray for the completion of that wipe,
prior to spraying for the required number
of wipes or duration.
If the rotary collar is set to AUTO, the
wipers will operate until no moisture is
detected.
Note: If the low washer fluid warning is
ON, the windshield wipers will not operate
when program wash and wipe is activated
even though there may be washer fluid
remaining in the reservoir and sprayed
onto the screen. This is to prevent
damage to the blades, scratching of the
glass, or smearing dirt across the screen.
Flick wiper, normal or fast operation, can
be selected to clear any spray from the
windshield.
HEADLAMP WASHERS
Note: Telescopic headlamp powerwash
units are contained within the front
headlamp units.
If the ignition system is in the ON position,
dipped beam headlamps are switched
ON and there is sufficient fluid in the
washer reservoir, pressing the program
wash and wipe button will also operate
the headlamp powerwash; directing two
short bursts of washer fluid onto the
headlamps.
After the first headlight powerwash
operation, the headlight powerwash will
operate on every fourth press of the
program wash and wipe button, provided
that the headlamps are still switched ON
and a 10 minute timer has elapsed since
the last headlamp powerwash.
Note:
•
The powerwash sequence is reset
when the headlamps or ignition is
turned OFF and ON again.
•
The headlamp powerwash function is
inhibited when the low washer fluid
warning is on.

69
Lighting
R
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION
Active front lighting system (AFL)
Active Front Lighting (AFL) is designed to
give the driver improved visibility under
varying driving conditions.
The illustration shows the light spread of a
vehicle NOT FITTED with AFL 1 and a
vehicle FITTED with AFL 2.
The main light source consists of
bi-functional (high and low beam) xenon
projector units.
The projector units are swivelled left or
right to improve the light spread on bends
in the road.
Bi-Xenon lights 3 provide significantly
improved visibility over halogen lights 4.
They also react dynamically in the vertical
plane to the vehicle’s braking or
acceleration to maximise headlamp
performance.
The units operate when the engine is
running and the master lighting switch set
to headlamps, see page 71, or AUTO, if
the ambient light has fallen below a preset
level.
The system takes inputs from the
vehicle’s road speed, steering angle to
determine the amount of horizontal
swivel. The amount of swivel is highest at
low speed, manoeuvring speeds and
reduces as speed increases.
If reverse gear is selected, the lamps
return to the central position and the
swivelling capability is disabled.
When the engine is started, the
headlamps can be seen to swivel as they
initiate a self-calibration cycle for a few
seconds.
1
JAG0126L
2
50
JAG0128L
100
3
4

Lighting
70
L
Cornering or static bending lamps
Additional lighting comes from the
cornering or static bending lamps which
are angled outwards from the centre line
of the vehicle.
These lamps broaden the beam of the
headlamps when cornering during normal
night driving.
The illustration shows the light spread of a
vehicle NOT FITTED 1 with static bending
lamps and a vehicle FITTED 2 with static
bending lamps.
The system switches on the lamp if it has
received an input from the vehicle’s
direction indicator. As the system is
ignition based, the lamp will not stay on
even if the vehicle is parked with the
direction indicator lever in the operating
position.
Only the lamp on the same side as the
operating direction indicator illuminates.
Note: Excessive rotation of the steering
wheel while the ignition system is in the
OFF position may cause incorrect
calibration of the static bending lamps. In
extreme situations the lamps may operate
earlier than previously experienced.
However, correct calibration of the lamps
is automatically re-established within 30
seconds of the vehicle being driven.
1
JAG0130L
2

71
Lighting
R
LIGHTING CONTROL
Note: If the ignition system is OFF and the
lamps are left ON, the message centre will
display LIGHTS ON.
The exterior lamps are controlled by the
left-hand column stalk switch.
The rotary collar on the stalk has three
positions for turning the exterior lamps on
or off and positions for autolamps and exit
delay. These are:
OFF
All exterior lamps OFF (except vehicles
provided with daylight running lamps).
Sidelamps
Switches on front sidelamps, tail, number
plate and any other marker lamps
required by local legislation. When the
external lamps are ON the instruments
will also be lit.
Headlamps
With the ignition in convenience mode,
see page 42, this position switches on low
beam headlamps in addition to the lights
switched on in sidelamp position.
The left-hand column stalk switch has two
positions for controlling the high beam.
Pulling the switch towards the steering
wheel and releasing causes the high
beam to flash on and off. The high beam
can be flashed at any time when the
switch is pulled and will remain ON for as
long as the switch is held.
The second position is to switch high
beam headlamps ON. With the ignition
system ON, see page 50, first select low
beam lamps, and then push the column
light switch away from the steering wheel.
The blue warning light on the instrument
cluster and high beam headlamps will
come ON.
To turn high beam OFF, pull the column
switch towards the steering wheel to
return to low beam.
JAG0132G
JAG0133G
JAG0134G
JAG0135G
JAG0136G

Lighting
72
L
Note: If low beam is switched OFF, the
rotary controls switch is moved, with high
beam still activated, both low and high
beam will be extinguished. Both low and
high beam will illuminate if low beam is
turned on again.
Autolamps
A light sensor control, mounted on the
front of the facia, monitors exterior light
levels and automatically switches the
sidelamps and low beam headlamps ON
or OFF.
The ignition system must be ON for full
automatic light operation.
When light fades towards dusk, the
sidelamps and headlamps will switch ON
automatically.
At dawn, as light increases, the sidelamps
and headlamps switch OFF automatically.
Do not cover the sensor and keep the
windshield clean. Obstructing the light in
this area of the sensor may lead to
unwanted operation of the sidelamps and
headlamps.
Windshield wiper detection
(This function only operates when
autolamps is selected.) The sidelamps
and headlamps will switch ON
automatically if the windshield wipers are
switched ON for 20 seconds or more.
Once the windshield wipers are switched
OFF, the sidelamps and headlamps will
automatically switch OFF two minutes
later.
Autolamps with Exit Delay
Three settings on the rotary collar set the
time that the headlamps will remain on
after the driver’s door has closed:
•30 seconds.
•60 seconds.
•120 seconds.
The message centre will display the
change set delay AUTOLAMP DELAY
X:XX or AUTOLAMP DELAY OFF when
the autolamp delay function has been
turned OFF.
Note: If the light switch rotary collar is in
the AUTO position there will be no exit
delay and the headlamps will turn off
when the ignition system is OFF.
Door guard and puddle lamps
Door guard lamps are fitted to each door
to give warning of an open door to
passing vehicles. Puddle lamps illuminate
the step out area at night.
Each lamp comes on automatically when
the door is opened. If the door is left open
the lamps remain on for approximately 15
minutes after returning from convenience
mode to power off.
JAG0137G
JAG0138G

73
Lighting
R
Daylight running lights
(Canada only)
In certain countries it is a legal
requirement for the lights to be on during
the hours of daylight.
With the rotary collar in the OFF position,
low beam headlamps, sidelamps, tail,
license plate lamps and, where fitted, side
marker lamps will switch on automatically
with the following conditions:
•The ignition system is ON.
•The vehicle gear selector out of park.
•The parkbrake is not applied (is
released).
Cabin Lighting
1. Courtesy light and footwell lights.
2. Left and right-hand reading and map
lights.
3. Centre console illumination.
Interior lighting comprises, front overhead
courtesy lights, two front reading and
map lights and front puddle lights. Vanity
mirrors, glove compartment, footwell and
luggage compartment lights are also
provided.
Press the centre switch 1 in the front roof
console to turn the courtesy lights, puddle
lights and footwell lights on. A second
press turns the lights off. The lights also
operate to illuminate the vehicle interior
when a door is opened.
The interior courtesy light and footwell
lights can be de-activated by pressing
the centre switch for more than two
seconds. The courtesy light will flash,
then switch OFF.
The courtesy light and footwell light will
come on again when the light switch is
pressed again for more than two seconds.
The centre console area is illuminated by
a small light from the overhead console 3.
This is on whenever the sidelights are on
and can be controlled by the dimmer
switch.
Reading lighting
The reading and map lights are turned on
and off by individual switches, 2 on the
front overhead console.
Illuminated entry and exit
The interior lights will gradually illuminate
when a door is opened and go out when
the engine is started or approximately 30
seconds after the last door is closed. If
any door is left open, the lights will fade
off after approximately 15 minutes after
returning from convenience mode to
power OFF.
When the vehicle is unlocked the courtesy
lights will come on at maximum
brightness for approximately 30 seconds
if a door is not opened.
With the engine running, opening any
door will put on all interior lights, they will
go out immediately after the last door is
closed.
JAG0143G 2 1 2
3

Lighting
74
L
Glove compartment
The glove compartment will illuminate
when opened.
Luggage compartment lighting
The luggage compartment will be
illuminated when the lid is opened.
Battery saver
If the interior lights are switched on using
the centre switch in the overhead console
and the ignition switch is in convenience
mode, the lights will automatically turn
OFF after approximately 15 minutes after
returning from convenience mode to
power off.
If the interior lights are switched on by
opening a door, the lights will
automatically turn off after approximately
15 minutes after returning from
convenience mode to power off.
If the glove compartment lights, luggage
compartment lights, reading and
map lights or vanity lights are switched
on, and the ignition switch is in
convenience mode or the remote
handset is removed, the lights will
automatically turn OFF after
approximately 15 minutes after returning
from convenience mode to power off.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
The direction indicators operate when the
ignition system is ON.
The left column stalk has two positions for
indicating left or right turn.
The first position, moving the stalk up or
down, causes the indicator to flash while
it is held in this position.
Flicking the stalk will give a three flash
lane changing signal.
The second position is a full movement of
the stalk up or down to indicate for a right
or left turn, which can then be released.
The indicators will remain flashing and will
cancel when the turn is completed.
An audible ticking and a flashing green
arrow on the instrument cluster indicates
that the selected direction indicator is ON.
Note: Should a direction indicator bulb
fail, the corresponding side green warning
light will flash at twice the normal rate. The
audible ticking will sound at twice the
normal rate.
Lane change flash
Move the left column stalk partially up or
down against spring pressure, then
release, to indicate a lane change. The
relevant direction indicator flashes three
times.
JAG0139G

75
Lighting
R
If the stalk is held against spring pressure,
the direction indicators will continue to
operate until the stalk is released.
Lane change flash can be disabled or
enabled by a Jaguar Dealer.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The fog lamps can only be switched on
when the ignition system is ON and when
sidelamp or low beam is selected.
With the lighting control switch in
sidelamp or low beam position, press the
switch 1 to turn on the front fog lamps.
Pushing the switch again will turn off the
front fog lamps.
Note: The front fog lamps should only be
used when visibility is severely restricted
by fog.
REAR FOG LAMP
The rear fog lamp can only be switched
on if the low beam headlamps are on or if
the sidelamps and front fog lamps are
switched on.
Press the switch 2 to turn on the rear fog
lamp. Pushing the switch again will turn
off the rear fog lamp.
Note:
•
Both front and rear fog lamps will be
turned off when the ignition system is
turned off, but will not be illuminated
when the ignition system is turned on
again.
•
The rear fog lamp should only be used
when visibility is severely restricted by
fog.
JAG0140L
1
2

Lighting
76
L
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The switch is in the centre console below
the touch-screen and operates with the
ignition ON or OFF. Use only in an
emergency to warn traffic of a vehicle
breakdown or approaching danger.
To operate: Press the switch; the
direction indicators, the instrument
cluster green indicators and audible
warning will operate in unison. The switch
icon will flash in unison with the
indicators.
To cancel: Press the switch again.
HEADLAMP LEVELLING
Auto headlight levelling
Automatic levelling of the headlamps is a
feature which avoids dazzling oncoming
drivers. A control unit adjusts the aim of
the lamps during acceleration,
deceleration and vehicle load conditions.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
When touring in right-hand traffic
countries, use the beam adjustment
mechanism located within each
headlamp unit to alter the beam pattern
accordingly.
When this is moved it enables the vehicle
to be driven in opposite hand drive
markets without having to stick blanking
decals onto the headlamp lens.
To adjust the headlamp:
1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page
78.
2. Twist anticlockwise and lift off the rear
headlamp unit cover.
3. Locate the adjustment lever, as
shown.
4. Move the lever fully downwards.
5. Refit the high beam cover and the
headlamp unit, see page 79.
Remember to place the levers back in
their original position when you have
returned to your country of origin.
JAG0142G
JAG0144G

77
Lighting
R
CHANGING A BULB
It is important that only the Jaguar
specified bulbs are used when renewing
bulbs.
The message centre will display a
message indicating which bulb requires
to be replaced.
Before renewing bulbs, switch off the
ignition system and light switches.
To change the bulbs within the headlamp
and taillamp, the complete units require to
be removed from the vehicle.
Note: In most countries it is illegal to use
a vehicle with a defective exterior lamp
bulb.
Headlight unit
!WARNING:
•Replacement or maintenance of
Xenon lights should be carried out
only by a Jaguar Dealer.
•Used Xenon lamp units contain
mercury which is hazardous and
can be injurious to health.
•Bi-Xenon lamp units operate at a
high temperature. If they have
recently been in use, allow
sufficient time for them to cool
down before touching them.
•The Xenon system generates up to
28,000 volts and contact with this
voltage could lead to a fatality.
Ensure that headlamps are
switched off before working on the
system.
Caution: Seek advice about proper
disposal of Bi-Xenon lamp units from
your Jaguar Dealer or your local
authority.
1. Side marker (bulb type WY5W).
2. Direction indicator (bulb type, front
3457AK, rear PY21Silver Vision).
3. Low and high beam projector unit
(bulb type D1S35W).
4. Sidelamp (bulb type W5W).
5. Cornering lamp (bulb type H8).
JAG0145G
21 3 4 5

Lighting
78
L
Removal of the headlamp unit
1. Remove the lower headlamp securing
bolt 1 located in the front of the wheel
arch. Turn the steering wheel to the
left, when removing the right-hand
headlamp and to the right when
removing the left-hand headlamp.
2. Open the hood and remove the upper
securing bolts 2.
3. Disconnect the headlamp powerwash
connector by pressing the button and
pulling the pipe apart 3, some washer
fluid may drain from the pipe when it
is disconnected.
4. Release the headlamp locating peg by
lifting the tongue upwards 4.
5. Carefully ease the headlamp unit
forward to gain access to the wiring
multi-plug connector. Release the
connector by pressing upwards on
the release button and pull the wiring
multi-plug from the headlamp 5. Place
the headlamp unit on a flat surface
covered in a soft material to prevent
damage to the unit’s lens.
5
JAG0146G
3
1
4
2
2

79
Lighting
R
Refitting the headlamp unit
1. Reconnect the wiring multi-plug
connector.
2. Offer up the unit into position.
3. Ensure that the locating peg is fitted
into the in-board locating hole.
4. To secure the headlamp unit, first
secure the wheel arch screw, then
repeat the removal procedure in the
reverse order, ensuring that the
powerwash pipe is reconnected.
Note: After the replacement of any bulb
and the fitting of the headlamp unit, the
aim of the headlamps should be checked
by a Jaguar Dealer.
Front side marker lamp
1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page
78.
2. Twist the bulb holder counter
clockwise and pull out the bulb
complete with the bulb holder.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
4. Insert the new bulb (WY5W) and
repeat the above procedure in reverse
order.
JAG0147G
3
JAG0148G
2
3

Lighting
80
L
Front direction indicator lamp
1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page
78.
2. Twist the bulb holder counter
clockwise and pull out the bulb
complete with the electrical
connector.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
4. Insert the new bulb (3457AK) and
repeat the above procedure in reverse
order.
Front sidelamp
1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page
78.
2. Twist and lift off the side domed cap.
3. Pull out the bulb complete with bulb
holder.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
5. Insert the new bulb (W5W) and repeat
the above procedure in the reverse
order. Ensure that the cover is fitted
correctly to retain the water tightness.
JAG0122N
2
3
JAG0150G
2
4

81
Lighting
R
Dip and main beam projector unit
Caution: It is strongly advised that the
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Xenon
low and high beam projector unit
(D1S35W) is replaced by a Jaguar
Dealer.
1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page
78.
2. Twist and lift off the rear domed cap.
3. Twist the bulb unit counter clockwise
to unlock it. Pull the bulb unit clear of
the headlamp unit.
4. Press the electrical connector release
lever and disconnect the bulb unit.
5. Press the bulb unit adaptor ring catch
and remove the adaptor ring from the
bulb unit.
6. Secure the bulb unit adaptor ring onto
the new bulb (D1S35W) and repeat
the above procedure in the reverse
order. Ensure that the cover is fitted
correctly to retain the water tightness.
JAG0151G
3
2
4
5

Lighting
82
L
Cornering or static bending lamp
Caution: Halogen bulbs will be
damaged if touched by hand or
contaminated with oil or grease. It is
important to use clean gloves or lint
free cloth when handling a bulb which
is to be used again. A contaminated
bulb may be cleaned with methylated
spirit before refitting.
1. Remove the headlamp unit, see page
78.
2. Twist and lift off the side domed cap.
3. Twist the bulb holder counter
clockwise to unlock, then pull out the
bulb complete with electrical
connector.
4. To release the bulb unit, lift the two
catches of the electrical connector,
then pull to remove the bulb unit.
5. Insert the new bulb unit (H8) and
repeat the above procedure in the
reverse order. Ensure that the cover is
fitted correctly to retain the water
tightness.
Front fog lamp
It is recommended that the front fog lamp
bulb is renewed by a Jaguar Dealer.
Rear fog and reverse lamps
!WARNING:
LED lamp units operate at a high
temperature. If they have recently been
in use, allow sufficient time for them to
cool down before touching them.
These lamps are LED units and are
integral to the luggage compartment lid.
They should only be replaced by a Jaguar
Dealer.
2
JAG0152G
3
4

83
Lighting
R
License plate lamp
1. Insert a wide flat bladed suitable tool,
twist and lever the lens out of the
surround panel. Ensure that the lens
moves to the outer edge of the
surround panel to release the
securing tangs.
2. Twist and pull out the bulb holder
complete with bulb.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
4. Insert the new bulb (W5WL).
5. Refit the lens by locating the outboard
securing tangs first and then pressing
it firmly into the recess until it clicks.
Side repeater indicator
1. Push the lens firmly towards the rear
of the vehicle and withdraw the light
unit from the wing panel.
2. Twist to release the bulb holder from
the lens unit.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
4. Insert the new bulb (WY5W) and
repeat the above procedure in the
reverse order.
JAG0153G
1
3
1
3
JAG0154G

Lighting
84
L
Removal of the rear lamp unit
The rear lamp unit contains four lamp
bulbs and it is necessary to remove the
unit from the vehicle in order to change
any of the bulbs.
1. Open the luggage compartment. For
the right-hand side unit, detach the
interior light unit from the trim panel
(Convertible) or the vent trim panel
(Coupe) and remove the two rear lamp
unit securing nuts. For the left-hand
side unit, detach the vent trim panel
and remove the rear lamp unit
securing nut.
2. Firmly pull the rear lamp unit trim
panel from the vehicle.
3. Firmly pull the rear lamp unit away
from the vehicle and disconnect the
wiring multi-plug connector. Remove
the lamp unit from the vehicle and
place the unit on a flat surface
covered in a soft material to prevent
damage to the unit’s lens. Each bulb
is now accessible by twisting off its
bulb holder and removing the bulb,
see page 85.
4. Insert a new bulb and repeat the
above procedure in the reverse order.
1
JAG0155G
3
2

85
Lighting
R
Rear lamp unit replacement bulbs
1. Side marker, (W5W).
2. Direction indicator, (PY21W Silver
Vision).
3. Stop and Tail, (P21/5W).
4. Tail, (W5W).
1
JAG0156G
2
34

Windows and Mirrors
86
L
Windows and Mirrors
ELECTRIC WINDOWS
!WARNING:
•Before operating power windows
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and ensure that
children and or pets are not in the
proximity of window openings.
Failure to do so could result in
serious personal injury. It is the
primary responsibility of the
supervising adults to never leave a
child unattended in a vehicle.
•When raising windows ensure all
occupants are clear.
•When leaving the vehicle take the
ignition keys to prevent misuse of
the window switches by remaining
occupants, especially children.
Switches on the driver’s door controls
both the driver and passenger door
windows.
The passenger door is provided with a
switch to control that door window only.
The ignition system must to be ON to
operate the windows.
These switches will only operate the
windows for five minutes when the
ignition switch remains in the
convenience mode position and the
driver’s and passenger’s doors remain
closed.
Raise and lower
To lower a window, press and hold the
front of the switch until the desired
position is reached, then release.
To raise a window, pull up and hold the
front of the switch until the desired
position is reached, then release.
If the switches are held for longer than six
seconds, for example, when attempting
to overcome frozen or jammed windows,
the window drive will be switched off for a
few seconds to protect the window drive
motors.
One-touch operation
Each window has a one-touch facility
enabling the occupant to fully open or
close the window in one quick movement.
Press the switch briefly to close or open
the window in one movement. Window
travel can be stopped at any time by
pressing the switch again, but will then be
controlled by pressing and holding the
switch.
Automatic window drop for door
opening
The frameless door windows create a seal
against the convertible top or the roof
seals. If fully raised, the door windows will
drop partially when the door release lever
is operated, this is to allow easy door
opening. When the door is closed the
windows rise to the fully closed position.
JAG0160L

87
Windows and Mirrors
R
The doors must not be opened if power
for automatic window drop is not
available, e.g. with battery disconnected.
However, in an emergency the doors can
be opened with the windows fully up.
Window anti-trap protection
!WARNING:
•Careless closing of the windows
can override the protection
function and cause injuries.
•If the battery is disconnected or
discharged the window anti-trap
protection feature is lost. When the
battery is reconnected or
recharged the window anti-trap
protection system must be reset.
Each electrically operated window has a
anti-trap protection feature. If the upward
movement of the window detects an
obstacle the anti-trap detection system
will immediately stop the window closing,
then move it downwards for a short
distance.
Anti-trap protection override
!WARNING:
While the window is being closed for
the third time, the anti-trap detection
function is disabled. Make sure there
are no obstacles in the way of the
closing window.
The anti-trap protection will also stop the
window closing if a blockage or
resistance occurs e.g. in the window
guide channels.
Typically this might be due to icing in
winter but could also be caused by
damage or misalignment of the guide
channels or seals.
•After the initial attempt to close the
window and the anti-trap detection
has initiated, operate the close switch
a second time. This action must be
carried out within ten seconds.
•The window will attempt to close
again and operate the anti-trap
detection. The window will now close
again for the third time, but will only
operate by pressing and holding the
switch with the anti-trap detection
disabled. The window will now close
with full power. The icing in the seal
can now be broken and dispersed.
•Repeat the override action until the
window has closed. Each time the
window stops, the switch must be
operated immediately to initiate
further override action.
If this procedure fails to move the
blockage, the anti-trap detection feature
will be lost and must be reset after the
blockage has been cleared.
Reset window anti-trap protection
Ensure that the respective door is closed
and, if fitted, the convertible roof closed.
•Fully close the window, then release
the switch. Again pull the switch to
close the window and hold for two
seconds.
•Open the window fully and release the
switch. Again press the switch to
open the window and hold for two
seconds.

Windows and Mirrors
88
L
•Check to confirm the operation by
opening the window and then use one
touch operation to close the window.
•Repeat for the remaining electrically
operated windows.
Thermal overload
If the windows are repeatedly opened and
closed (e.g. by a child), a protection
system will de-activate window operation
for a short period to avoid overheating of
the window motors.
Caution: Do not close the door with the
windows fully up as damage to the
seals and the glass will occur.
Rear quarter window operation
(Convertible only)
The rear quarter windows operate
automatically in conjunction with
convertible roof opening or closing.
The rear quarter windows may also be
operated independently of the convertible
roof when the convertible roof is closed,
by means of the convertible roof switch
on the overhead console, as follows:
To lower: Press the rear of the switch for
less than a second and the rear quarter
windows will be driven down fully.
To raise: Press the front of the switch and
hold and the rear quarter windows will
rise for as long as the switch is held.
Notes on rear quarter window
operation:
1. When the convertible roof is opened
the rear quarter windows are
automatically lowered and cannot be
operated until the roof is closed.
When the roof is closed the rear
quarter windows are automatically
raised.
2. The rear quarter windows operate
together and cannot be operated
individually.
WINDOW TINTING
Caution: Do not have your vehicle
windows tinted with a metal oxide
tinting (for maximum heat reduction
from the sun) if you have a telephone or
navigation system fitted to your
vehicle.
Metal oxide tinting prevents the reception
of the Global Positioning System (GPS)
signals by the antenna, causing the
navigation system to stop functioning.
A nonmetal tinting should be used if you
require window tinting and if in doubt,
contact your Jaguar Dealer for advice.
JAG0162L

89
Windows and Mirrors
R
ELECTRIC EXTERIOR
MIRRORS
Caution: The right-hand mirror is
convex, providing a wider field of
vision. As a result, objects viewed in
the mirror are closer than they appear.
Both electrochromic door mirrors are
adjusted from the driver’s door
switchpack.
The four-way adjustment button 1 moves
the mirrors to the required position. The
selector button 2 selects the mirror to be
moved, L for the left-hand side mirror and
R for the right-hand side mirror.
The mirror housings are designed to pivot
against the vehicle upon impact.
Caution: If door mirrors have been
folded against the vehicle due to an
impact, reposition the mirrors
manually.
Mirror heating
Caution: Do not use a scraper to
remove ice from the mirrors as this will
damage the surface.
The door mirrors have heating elements
which operate automatically based on the
external ambient temperature of the
vehicle. The mirror heater will clear all ice
from the mirror surface.
Mirror dip when reversing
Reverse mirror dipping is selected via the
touch-screen.
From the main Home touch-screen
menu, select Vehicle:
•Select Veh. settings.
•The Security button is selected
automatically as the default.
•Select Parking.
•Select Reverse mirror dip ON.
When reverse gear is selected, the
passenger mirror inclines downwards to
provide a close up view of the rear side
area. When the gear selector is moved out
of reverse, the mirror will return to its
original position.
JAG0041L
2 1
2
mirror dip
Vol. presets
Off On
Vehicle
Security
Parking
Valet mode
Reverse
12 : 26 pm
JAG0165NAS

Windows and Mirrors
90
L
The reverse mirror dip alignment can be
adjusted by using the four-way
adjustment button 1 when the mirror has
completed movement to its reverse dip
position. This new selected position is
maintained until re-adjusted
Note: When reversing, if a speed of
greater than 7 km/h (4 mph) is achieved,
then the mirrors will revert to the previous
position. However, if the speed is then
reduced to below 7 km/h (4 mph), then the
mirrors will revert to the dipped position.
INTERIOR MIRROR
During night time driving with the ignition
switched on, the interior mirror will darken
automatically in proportion to the amount
of glare detected from a following
vehicle’s headlights.
When you shift the gear selector lever into
reverse, the interior mirror dimming
feature will be automatically switched off
for a clearer view whilst reversing.
Note:
•
Should a mirror assembly become
detached from the windshield, it must
be refitted by a Jaguar Dealer.
•
Ensure that the windshield in front of
the mirror is kept clean. Where fitted,
the moisture sensor for wiper
operation is located to the front of the
mirror casing. Any dirt may affect the
operation of this sensor.
•
The automatic darkening of the mirror
will not operate properly if the light
that would otherwise strike the mirror
is obstructed.
JAG0168L

91
Occupant Protection
R
Chapter 4
FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS
!WARNING:
•Seat belts are life saving
equipment. In a collision,
occupants not wearing a seat belt
can be thrown around inside, or
possibly thrown out of the vehicle.
This is likely to result in more
serious injuries than would have
been the case had a seat belt been
properly worn. It may even result in
loss of life.
•Make sure all occupants are
securely strapped in at all times -
even for the shortest journeys.
•Belts should not be worn with the
straps twisted.
•Always ensure that the webbing is
midway between the neck and the
edge of the shoulder.
•Each seat belt assembly must only
be used by one occupant; it is
dangerous to put a belt around a
child being carried on the
occupant’s lap.
•Do not try to put an adult seat belt
around two children.
•Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the body
and should be worn low across the
front of the pelvis or the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable;
wearing the lap section of the belt
across the abdominal area must be
avoided.
•Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
•Care should be taken to avoid
contamination of the webbing with
polishes, oils and chemicals, and
particularly battery acid. Cleaning
may safely be carried out using
mild soap and water.The belt
should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged.
•It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in a
severe impact even if damage to
the assembly is not obvious.
•No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating
to remove slack, or prevent the
seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
•Should the seat belt not retract and
remain at its static length, you
should consult your nearest Jaguar
Dealer immediately.
•Replacement and renewal of seat
belts should be carried out by
Jaguar Dealers only.
The use of front and rear seat belts is
mandatory in most countries. Using seat
belts saves lives.

Occupant Protection
92
L
!WARNING:
Do not adjust the seat belt while
driving.
Draw the tongue of the seat belt over the
shoulder, across the chest and push it
into the buckle unit slot 1. A positive click
indicates that it is safely locked.
The use of comfort clips or devices that
would create slackness in the seat belt
system is not advised.
Ensure that the webbing is midway
between the neck and the edge of the
shoulder. Correct tension is controlled by
automatic retraction of the reel.
Always wear seat belts without slack or
twists, since any slack in a seat belt
reduces the effectiveness of the belt and
the level of protection it can provide. For
optimum protection, the seat belts should
fit tightly around the body. Do not recline
the front seats excessively. Optimum
benefit is obtained from the seat belt with
the seat back angle set to no more than
30 degrees from the upright.
Note: If the vehicle is parked on unlevel
ground, the seat belt mechanism may
lock. This is not a fault, allow the seat belt
to retract a small amount before gently
easing the belt from its attachment to
unlock it.
Belt buckle release
To release the belt buckle, press the
release button 2 in the buckle unit and
guide the belt back up to the seat
mounted webbing guide.
Front occupants only: The front seat
belts are equipped with an automatic
webbing tension relieving device. This
device will reduce the webbing loads
experienced by the occupant when the
seat belt is correctly worn without
inducing any slack webbing.
The device is activated when, with the
ignition system ON and the seat belt
tongue engaged in the buckle, webbing is
extracted on occupant lean forward (a
series of clicks indicate the range of
movement with reduced tension).
If the engine is turned off with the seat
belts still fastened, a slight increase in
seat belt tension may be felt. This is
normal, it is part of the seat belt
assembly’s tension control device.
Front passenger seat belt -belt
tensioner sensor (Canada and USA
only)
The front passenger seat belt is fitted with
a belt tension sensor which is part of the
occupant classification sensor system,
for further information see page 96.
1
JAG0173G
2

93
Occupant Protection
R
Seat belt guide and retainer
To assist with both access and
positioning of the front seat belt webbing,
a guide-retainer is incorporated into each
front seat.
When the front seat back is tilted forward
to gain access to the rear of the vehicle it
is recommended that the seat belt is
removed from the guide.
On returning the front seat back to the
upright position ensure that the seat belt
is returned to the seat belt guide.
Inertia reel mechanism test
•With the seat belt fastened, give the
webbing near the buckle a quick
upward pull. The buckle must remain
securely locked.
•With the seat belt unfastened, unreel
the webbing to the limit of its travel.
Check that the unreeling is free from
snatches and snags and then allow
the belt to fully retract.
•Partially unreel the webbing, then
hold the tongue plate and give it a
quick forward pull. The mechanism
must lock automatically and prevent
any further unreeling.
If a seat belt should fail any of these
tests, contact your Jaguar Dealer.
SEAT BELT REMINDER
The belt reminder feature provides
additional reminder to the driver that an
occupant’s seat belt is unbuckled. A
chime will sound intermittently.
Note: Not all countries have the warning
chime.
Seat belt warning
A warning indicator on the
instrument panel is illuminated
when:
•The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
•A passenger is sitting in the front seat
and their seat belt is not fastened.
In some countries a warning signal
sounds for six seconds.
JAG0174L

Occupant Protection
94
L
USING SEAT BELTS DURING
PREGNANCY
!WARNING:
Position the seat belt correctly for the
mother and unborn child. Never wear
just the lap strap and never sit on the
lap strap while using just the shoulder
strap. Both of these actions are
extremely dangerous and may increase
your risk of serious injury in the event
of an accident.
Position the lap strap comfortably across
the hips and low beneath the pregnant
abdomen. Place the diagonal part of the
seat belt between the breasts, above and
to the side of the pregnant abdomen.
Always wear a seat belt without slack or
twists.
JAG0176G

95
Occupant Protection
R
OCCUPANT SENSING
!WARNING:
•No objects whatsoever should be
attached to the centre cover of the
steering wheel, the passenger
fascia panel, the sides of the front
seats or the interior trim
immediately above the door
openings. Do not put anything on or
over the air bag inflation area.
Placing objects on or over the air
bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled inside the
vehicle causing serious injury to the
occupants.
•Occupants with disabilities that
may require the vehicle to be
modified must contact a Jaguar
Dealer before any modifications are
made.
Note: (USA only) If you are considering
modifying your vehicle in any way to
accommodate a disability, for
example by altering or adapting the
driver’s or passenger’s seat(s) or air
bag system, please contact Jaguar
Cars at:
Jaguar Cars
Customer Relations Center
555 MacArthur Blvd
Mahwah
New Jersey 07430-2327
1-800-4JAGUAR OPTIONS 9.
•Several air bag system components
get hot after inflation. Do not touch
them after they have deployed.
•If an air bag has inflated, the air bag
will not function again and must be
renewed immediately. If a new air
bag is not fitted, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
In order to provide optimum protection
this vehicle is equipped with front and
side air bags. They are used in
conjunction with the seat belts to help
protect occupants from upper body
(thorax) and head injuries.

Occupant Protection
96
L
Air bag location
1. Driver’s air bag.
2. Front passenger air bag.
3. Combined head and thorax side air
bags are identified by labels.
System sensors
The air bags and seat belt pretensioners
are electrically controlled by an Advanced
Restraints Technology System (ARTS).
Various sensors determine the direction
and severity of an impact. The system
analyses this information then deploys
only the appropriate air bags e.g. the side
air bags where the impact is on that side
only.
are not designed to deploy at very low
speeds or in rear impacts.
Occupancy classification sensor
A weight sensitive sensor is located in the
front passenger seat to determine the
weight acting upon the seat. In certain
conditions, e.g. where no passenger is
present, the appropriate will be
deactivated. In a collision these would not
be deployed.
JAG0177L
1
2
3
JAG0512L

97
Occupant Protection
R
The occupancy weight sensor operates
as follows:
*It is possible to receive an intermittent
indicator illuminated with an empty seat
condition. This is part of the system’s
adaptive behaviour, and does not affect
the status of the passenger air bag.
However, if the indicator becomes
permanently illuminated when the seat is
definitely empty and the seat belt is
unbuckled, then contact your nearest
Jaguar Dealer immediately.
•If the seat is empty and the seat belt
unbuckled, the front passenger air
bag will not be activated and the air
bag indicator will not be illuminated.
•If the seat is occupied by, for
example, a small child or object with
the seat belt buckled, the front
passenger air bag will not be
activated and the air bag indicator will
be illuminated.
•If the seat is occupied by a larger child
or adult, the front passenger air bag
will be activated and the air bag
indicator will not be illuminated.
•** (Canada and USA only) Belt
tension sensor (BTS): If a child
restraint is fitted in the front
passenger seat using the seat belt’s
automatic locking device (see page
105), then the BTS supports the
decision function of the occupant
classification sensor and the front
passenger air bag is deactivated.
Note: The occupancy sensing system is
designed to confirm that a front
passenger is properly seated as
recommended:
•
Always sit centrally in the seat,
remaining in contact with the seat
back which for comfort should be
rearwards of the vertical position.
•
Adjust the seat to be as far back from
the facia as is practical.
•
Always wear seat belts.
The seat adjustment controls are
described on page 57.
Passenger
occupancy
status
Passenger
air bag
status
Indicator
active
Completely
empty
Deactivated No*
Low weight
occupant/
object
Deactivated Yes
Heavy
occupant/
object
Activated No
Child
restraint
fitted **
Deactivated Yes

Occupant Protection
98
L
Air bag deactivation indicator
The air bag indicator, on the centre
console is associated with the
deployment conditions for front seat
passenger air bags only.
Whenever the air bag indicator is
illuminated, the front passenger air bags
will not be deployed in the event of an
impact. Where the air bags are not
deployed, protection is provided by the
seat belts.
Note: The air bag indicator will illuminate
when the ignition system initially comes
on as part of the warning lamp check and
will extinguish after approximately six
seconds.
Overall system components
The overall occupant protection system,
Advanced Restraint Technology System
(ARTS) comprises the following
components:
1. Dual front crash sensors.
2. Passenger dual stage air bag.
3. Passenger buckle pretensioner.
4. Passenger seat occupancy sensor.
5. Passenger belt tension sensor.
6. Passenger side head and thorax air
bag.
7. Passenger side crash sensor.
8. Right-hand rollover protection bar
(convertible only).
9. Left-hand rollover protection bar
(convertible only).
10. Restraint control module.
11. Driver side crash sensor.
12. Driver side head and thorax air bag.
13. Driver buckle pretensioner.
14. Driver dual stage air bag (steering
wheel).
JAG0516N
1
JAG0538N
3
6
7
8
14
9
13
12
11
5
4
2
10

99
Occupant Protection
R
AIR BAG LABELS
An alert label on the front face of the
driver’s and passenger’s sun visor directs
you to read the warning label on the rear
face of each sun visor.
The warning label contains the following
statement:
!WARNING:
EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS
- Children can be killed or seriously
injured by the air bag.
- The back seat is the safest place for
children.
- Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.
- Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
- See Owners Manual for more
information about air bags.
DRIVER AIR BAG
!WARNING:
The air bag is a supplementary
restraint system that provides
additional protection in a severe
impact only - it does not replace the
need to wear seat belts. For maximum
safety protection in all crash situations,
a seat belt must be worn.
Note: Provided front seat occupants are
correctly seated, with seat belts worn, the
air bag will give additional protection to
the chest and facial areas in the event of
an accident.
Both front air bags use a dual inflation
technology which means, if activated, the
air bags will deploy as appropriate for the
severity of frontal impact.
Air bag deployment
!WARNING:
Activation of an air bag creates dust,
causing possible breathing difficulties
for asthma sufferers or other people
with respiratory problems. If an air bag
is activated, any occupant who suffers
from breathing difficulties should;
either leave the vehicle as quickly as
possible, or obtain fresh air by fully
opening the windows and doors.
Following inflation, some air bag
components are hot - do not touch
until they have cooled.
JAG0540N

Occupant Protection
100
L
Even with air bag equipment fitted,
seat belts must always be worn
because:
•An air bag will only provide
additional protection in certain
types of frontal collision. No
protection is afforded against the
effects of rear impacts, or minor
frontal impacts.
•Inflation and deflation takes place
instantaneously and will not
provide protection against the
effects of secondary impacts that
can occur during multiple vehicle
collisions.
•An inflating air bag can cause facial
abrasions and other injuries.
Minimise the risk of injury by
ensuring that front seat occupants
are wearing their seat belts and are
seated correctly, with the seat as
far back as is practical.
When an air bag inflates, a fine powder is
released. This is not an indication of a
malfunction. However, the powder may
cause irritation to the skin and should be
thoroughly flushed from the eyes and any
cuts or abrasions of the skin. After
inflation, front and side air bags deflate
immediately (head air bags deflate
slowly). This provides a gradual
cushioning effect for the occupants and
also ensures that the driver’s forward
vision is not obscured.
Front protection
With a front impact of sufficient force,
the restraints system will trigger the front
air bag(s) and seat belt pretensioners,
which immediately tighten the seat belts.
The seat belts then ease, allowing the
head and chest to contact the inflated air
bag.The air bag absorbs the remaining
energy of the impact and then deflates
rapidly via vent holes.
Front air bags are designed to inflate only
in frontal and near frontal collisions.
JAG0183L

101
Occupant Protection
R
SIDE AIR BAGS
!WARNING:
To ensure that the side air bags are
fully effective do not sit too close to, or
lean against the door trim. The side air
bag could injure you as it deploys from
the side of the seat.
The air bags, in combination with the seat
belts, can help reduce the risk of severe
injuries in the event of a significant side
impact collision.
When the seat mounted head and thorax
air bag inflates, it breaks through the seat
bolster stitching, giving protection to the
side of the rib cage and head of the driver
or front seat passenger.
The combined head and thorax side air
bags are designed to inflate only in a side
impact collision, unless the collision
causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
AIR BAG WARNING LAMP
The air bag warning indicator in
the driver’s instrument panel
will be lit for approximately six
seconds when the ignition is turned on.
If the indicator remains on, it indicates a
fault. Report the fault to a Jaguar Dealer
immediately. It is safe to drive the vehicle;
however, in an accident the air bags may
not operate.
Air bag warning lamp information is
shown on page 115.
AIR BAG SERVICE
INFORMATION
Air bag disposal
!WARNING:
Do not attempt to service, repair,
replace, modify or tamper with any part
of the air bag system or its electrical
fuses. Doing so could cause the
system to activate, resulting in
personal injury.
In the event of the vehicle being
dismantled, air bag module removal and
disposal must be carried out by a
qualified person.
JAG0185L

Occupant Protection
102
L
WHIPLASH PROTECTION
Both front seats are equipped with Active
Head Restraints (AHR) which reduce the
risk of neck and spinal injury (whiplash) in
the event of a rear impact.
When activated, the head restraint moves
upwards and forwards, supporting the
occupant’s head.
After activation, the whiplash protection
mechanism automatically resets and
does not require to be replaced.
ROLLOVER BARS
(Convertible only)
!WARNING:
•Do not place any objects on top of
the system trim covers behind the
rear passenger head restraints as
they could prevent correct
deployment of the system.
•Do not try to reset the system if it
deploys.
•Do not let anyone sit on the top
cover.
The Rollover Protection Device (RPD)
consists of two inverted U-shaped bars,
that are concealed underneath the rear
parcel shelf behind the rear passenger
seats, and sensors that monitor the
attitude of the vehicle.
If the sensors determine that a risk of
rollover is imminent, the rollover bars will
be deployed.
Note: When the rollover bars are
deployed they will deliberately break the
rear screen if the convertible top is closed.
If the Rollover Protection Device has been
deployed, proceed to your nearest Jaguar
Dealer to check for any damage and to
reset the system.
JAG0528L
JAG0189G

103
Child Safety
R
Child Safety
CHILD SEATS
General safety information
!WARNING:
•Extreme hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an air bag in front
of it!
•Children must be restrained by a
child safety restraint that is suitable
for their weight and size.
•Children 12 years old and younger
can be killed or seriously injured by
the air bag. The rear seat is the
safest place for properly restrained
children.
•Do not install a rearward-facing
child seat in the front passenger
seat position since deployment of
the passenger facia air bag could
cause death or serious injury to the
child.
If, however, you have no alternative
but to place a child in the front
passenger seat, use only a
forward-facing child seat with the
passenger seat set fully rearward
and in its lowest position.
•Always follow the fitting
instructions supplied with the
appropriate child restraint system.
It is important to read and
understand all the information
contained in this handbook relating
to child safety before carrying a
child in your vehicle.
If you are unsure about any aspect
of this information, contact your
Jaguar Dealer.
In many countries legislation governs how
and where children should be carried
when travelling in a vehicle.
It is the responsibility of the driver to
comply with all regulations in force in the
country where the vehicle is being used.
Holding a baby or child in a person’s arms
is not a substitute for a child restraint
system.
In an accident, a baby or child held in this
manner can be crushed between the
vehicle’s interior and a restrained person.
The child can be injured by hitting the
interior or by being thrown from the
vehicle during a sudden manoeuvre or
impact.
JAG0190L

Child Safety
104
L
The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are
designed for adults and larger children.
For their safety, it is very important that all
infants and children under 12 years of age
are restrained in a suitable child safety
seat appropriate to their age and size..
Choosing a suitable child seat
!WARNING:
Choose a child seat that sits securely
on the seat cushion and against the
seat back.
Before you buy a child seat, it is important
to note that your child’s weight, rather
than age, determines the type of seat that
is required.
Jaguar strongly recommends the use
of LATCH seats, see page 106.
Babies and small children who cannot sit
up by themselves should be carried in an
approved rear facing infant carrier, which
should always be installed in a rear seat
position.
Jaguar recommends that a rear-facing
seat with a harness is used for as long
as your infant’s development allows.
Note: For approved child restraints, you
should contact your Jaguar Dealer.
Do not use a forward-facing seat until
your child is above the minimum weight of
9 kg (20 lbs) and able to sit up unaided.
Up to the age of two, a child’s spine and
neck are not sufficiently developed to
avoid injury in a frontal impact.
We strongly advise that you do not buy or
use a second-hand child seat. The seat
may have been used inappropriately, or
involved in an accident. In such
circumstances, the seat may not protect
your child.
Always check that the child seat can be
mounted securely in the required
position: if in doubt, you should speak to
your Jaguar Dealer.
Look for the following when selecting a
child restraint system:
•It should have a label certifying that it
meets the applicable Regulations.
•Carefully read the instructions
supplied with the restraint. Be sure
you understand them and can install
and use the device properly and
safely in the vehicle.
•Ensure that the child restraint system
is appropriate for the child’s weight
and development, refer to page 105..
Infant safety
Babies and small children who cannot sit
up by themselves should be carried in an
approved rear facing infant carrier, which
should always be installed in a rear
seating position.

105
Child Safety
R
CHILD SEATS
Fitting the child seat
Front and rear passenger seat belts have
an automatic locking device for use with
child seats.
When engaged, this device allows the belt
to be retracted (tightened) but not pulled
out. When used to secure a child seat,
therefore, the belt will automatically lock
at any point to which it has retracted.
1. Pull the seat belt all the way out to
engage the locking device.
2. Insert the metal tongue plate into the
buckle. A positive click indicates that
it is safely locked.
3. To fix the seat firmly, retract the belt
back to the reel, a ratchet operation
may be felt as the belt retracts.
Continue to feed the belt back onto
the reel until it fits snugly around the
child seat.
PROPER CHILD SAFETY SEAT USE CHART
Buckle Everyone. Children Age 12 and Under in Back.
INFANTS TODDLER YOUNG CHILDREN
WEIGHT Birth to 1 year at
least 20 to 22 lb (9 to
10 kg).
Over 1 year and Over
20 - 40 lb (9 to 18
kg).
Over 40 lb (18 kg)
Ages 4 - 8, unless 4ft
9ins (145 cm).
TYPE of SEAT Infant only or rear
facing, convertible.
Convertible /
Forward-facing.
Belt positioning
booster seat.
SEAT
POSITION
Rear-facing only. Forward-facing. Forward-facing.
ALWAYS
MAKE SURE
Children to 1 year
and at least 20 lb (9
kg) in rear-facing
seats.
Harness straps at or
below shoulder level.
Harness straps
should be at or
above shoulders.
Most seats require
top slot for
forward-facing.
Belt positioning
booster seats must
be used with both
lap and shoulder
belt.
Make sure the
lapbelt fits low and
tight across the
lap/upper thigh area
and the shoulder belt
fits snug crossing
the chest and
shoulder to avoid
abdominal injuries.
WARNING All children age 12
and under should
ride in the back seat.
All children age 12
and under should
ride in the back seat.
All children age 12
and under should
ride in the back seat.

Child Safety
106
L
4. Push down on the child seat to ensure
any slack is taken in by the
mechanism.
The above is a guide only. Depending on
the features of a particular child seat, e.g.
forward or rearward-facing, engage the
locking device before or after attaching
the belt, as convenient.
Unbuckling the belt and releasing the
child seat will allow the belt to resume its
normal operation.
General check list
Follow the check list each time your child
travels in the vehicle:
•Carefully follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer of the
restraint system.
•Make sure your child falls into the
correct weight range for the seat.
•Always use the appropriate child
restraints and adjust harnesses for
every child, every trip.
•Avoid dressing your child in bulky
clothing and do not place any objects
between the child and the restraint
system.
•Regularly check the fit of your child
seat and replace seats or harnesses
that show signs of wear.
•No child seat is completely
child-proof. Encourage your child not
to play with the buckle or harness.
•Never leave a child unsupervised in
the vehicle.
•Ensure your child does not exit the
vehicle from the side where there is
traffic.
•Set your child a good example –
always wear your seat belt.
•Ensure that you have removed all
slack from the adult seat belt.
Child restraint top tether anchorages
and brackets
(Coupe only)
The top tether brackets are positioned on
the rear parcel shelf, under access
covers, at the centre-line of each rear
seating position.
Lift the top tether cover and connect the
top tether to the bracket on the rear shelf.
Adjust the length of the top tether strap to
hold the top of the child seat against the
vehicle seat back.
LATCH ANCHOR POINTS
(Lower Anchorages and Tethers for CHild
restraints)
JAG0192G

107
Child Safety
R
!WARNING:
Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
for attaching other items or equipment
to the vehicle.
The rear seats of your vehicle are fitted
with LATCH brackets that allow the
LATCH child seat to be secured directly
and easily to the vehicle body without the
use of adult seat belts.
Many injuries to children in accidents are
caused by the incorrect fitting and
tensioning of the adult seat belts, which
are normally used to secure child seats.
The LATCH system reduces the likelihood
of incorrect fitting and is also quicker and
simpler to use.
LATCH child restraint system
Many LATCH child seats have two
retractable lower catches that lock onto
the anchorage loops, see page 108, and a
strap that clips onto the top tether
bracket, see page 106. The child seats
may have quick release mechanisms to
allow them to be removed easily.
The anchorage loops are accessible
through two trimmed apertures at the
back of the rear seat cushion. Their
location is highlighted by the small tag
labels with a child seat graphic. The
anchorage loops are located
approximately 60 mm (2.5 inches) below
each label, Pull back the side of the trim
as indicated, see illustration, to reveal the
aperture and the anchorage loops.
JAG0196G

Child Safety
108
L
Installing the LATCHISOfix seat
To ensure that the LATCHISOfix child
seat is installed safely, read all the
information provided in this Section.
!WARNING:
Always follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with the
LATCHISOfix child seat. The following
is to be considered only as a guide.
Fit the seat as follows:
1. Push the adult seat belt buckles into
their stowage recesses, to ensure
they do not interfere with the fitment
of the child seat.
2. Make sure there is nothing
obstructing the seat mounting
mechanism at the anchorage points.
3. Release the lever on the rear of the
seat and fully extend the two
attachment legs on the child seat.
Ensure the hook at the end of each leg
is open.
4. Position the attachment legs just in
front of the trimmed apertures for the
LATCHISOfix anchorage loops (see
illustration). Push the anchorage leg
through the trimmed aperture to
engage with the vehicle’s anchorage
loop. There should be an audible
click.
5. Repeat Step 4 for the seat’s second
anchorage leg.
6. Using firm and even pressure on both
sides, push the child seat rearwards
until it is secured firmly against the
seat back. Make sure you do not trap
the top tether strap behind the child
seat.
7. If your vehicle is fitted with top tether
anchorages brackets, make sure that
the top tether strap is secured to the
anchorage bracket, see page 106.
8. As a final check, firmly pull both sides
of the seat to confirm that it is
correctly locked in position.
Caution: Always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions supplied
with the LATCHISOFIX child seat.
Removing the LATCHISOfix seat
To remove the LATCHISOfix child seat,
press the locking button on each side of
the seat to release anchorage legs. If your
vehicle is fitted with top tether
anchorages, undo the top tether strap
and lift the child seat from the vehicle.
BOOSTER CUSHIONS
If a booster cushion is used, position the
lap section of the adult seat belt over the
child’s pelvis. The diagonal seat belt
should rest on the child’s shoulder, not
the neck.
JAG0197G

109
Facia and Controls
R
Chapter 5
CONTROL LOCATIONS
Auto
km
Inst Fuel
l/100km
JAG0511N
23
25
27
28
26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1720
19
18
22
24
16
15
29
21

Facia and Controls
110
L
1. Steering wheel audio switches (64).
2. External light switches (71).
3. Jaguar sequential gear change down
paddle (159).
4. Speedometer (111).
5. Driver’s horn and air bag (63).
6. Message centre (111).
7. Tachometer (111).
8. Jaguar sequential gear change up
paddle (159).
9. Wiper and washer switch (65).
10. Cruise control or adaptive cruise
control switches (169).
11. Audio panel (184).
12. Hazard warning switch (76).
13. Touch-screen display (121).
14. Climate control panel (132).
15. Glove box compartment release
button (142).
16. Gear selector (157).
17. Automatic speed limiter switch (180).
18. Parkbrake switch (164).
19. Dynamic stability control mode switch
(166).
20. Engine START/STOP switch (50).
21. Ashtray and cigar lighter (140).
22. Steering column adjustment switch
(62).
23. Front fog lamp switch (75).
24. Dimmer switch (140).
25. Rear fog lamp switch 75).
26. Luggage compartment release switch
(43).
27. Forward alert switch (177).
28. Fuel filler flap release switch (52).
29. Hood release lever (234).
Page numbers (shown in brackets) refer
to pages in this handbook that have
further relevant information.

111
Instruments
R
Instrum ents
INSTRUMENT PANEL
OVERVIEW
None of the instruments will show correct
indications until the ignition system is in
the ON condition, see page 50.
1. Speedometer
Speed indication is in either:
USA - miles per hour, the outer figures,
and kilometres per hour on the inner ring.
Canada and Mexico - kilometres per
hour, the outer figures, and miles per hour
on the inner ring.
2. Message centre
For more detailed information on the
message centre, see page 118.
Message centre illumination
The message centre is lit at all times when
the ignition is ON, see page 50.
3. Tachometer)
Indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute (x 1 000) and is calibrated in
increments of 250 rev/min.
Caution: Do not allow the needle to
enter the red sector.
4. Fuel gauge
The small arrow on the top of the fuel
pump symbol indicates which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler cap is located.
The message centre will display the
message FUEL LEVEL LOW when the
fuel level is approximately 1/16 tank
capacity, approximately a distance range
of 48 to 64 km (30 to 40 miles).
AVE FUEL
A
MPG
JAG0201N
3
4
1 2

Instruments
112
L
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
1. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) - USA
only.
2. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) -
Canada only.
3. Adaptive cruise control (ACC).
4. Active front lighting system (AFL).
5. Engine malfunction.
6. Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS).
7. Air bag.
8. Right-hand direction indicator.
9. Front fog lights.
10. Rear fog light.
11. Dynamic stability control (DSC).
12. High beam.
13. Side lamps.
14. Seat belt.
15. Driver information center.
16. Automatic speed limiter (ASL).
17. Forward alert.
18. Parkbrake on/brake fluid low - USA
only.
19. Parkbrake on/brake fluid low -
Canada only.
20. Left-hand direction indicator.
RED warning lamps are for primary
warnings. A primary warning must be
investigated immediately by the driver or
a Jaguar Dealer.
AMBER warning lamps are for secondary
warnings. Some indicate that a vehicle
system is in operation, others indicate
that the driver must take action and then
report the fault to a Jaguar Dealer at the
earliest opportunity.
Other lamps within the instrument cluster
indicate system status, such as blue for
main beam and green for direction
indicators, when in operation.
AVE FUEL
A
MPG
JAG0003N
4 5 6
13 789
14161718 1112
3
15
20
1 2
19 10

113
Instruments
R
Lamp check
A lamp check is initiated when the ignition
system is in the ON condition and lasts for
three seconds (excepting the air bag
warning lamp which will remain ON for six
seconds). If any warning lamp remains
ON after this period, investigate the cause
before driving.
Some warning lamps have associated
messages displayed on the message
centre.
Note: Not all lamps are included in the
lamp check, for example main beam
headlights or direction indicators.
Brake (Red)
!WARNING:
If the message LOW BRAKE FLUID is
displayed, do not drive the vehicle until
the brake fault is rectified. Consult a
Jaguar Dealer immediately.
Illuminates when:
•the ignition system is ON and the
parkbrake is ON
•and, or the brake fluid is low
•and, or there is a fault with the
electronic brake system.
If the light is ON and there are no
associated messages it means that the
parkbrake is applied.
If the light flashes, there is a fault with the
parkbrake system and the parkbrake
cannot be applied.
If the indicator lamp is ON and the
message PARK BRAKE APPLIED is
displayed, it means that the parkbrake is
applied but the vehicle is moving. Release
the parkbrake or stop the vehicle when it
is safe to do so.
If the indicator lamp is ON and the
message BRAKE FLUID LOW with a RED
priority light is displayed on the message
centre, low brake fluid is indicated. In this
case, loss of braking in one or both brake
circuits may be imminent. Stop the
vehicle gently and seek qualified
assistance.
Seat belt (Red)
The warning light stays on for
60 seconds when the ignition is
ON and:
•The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
•Or after a passenger is sitting in the
front seat and their seat belt is not
fastened.
The indicator lamp should go out when
the driver’s seat belt (and the front
passenger’s if the seat is occupied) is
fastened.
Beltminder
The beltminder feature, which
uses the same indicator as the
seat belt warning, provides
reminders to the driver that the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s seat belt is
unbuckled.
If the vehicle is moving at or above
16 km/h (10 mph) and the seat belt of an
occupied seat is not fastened, the
indicator lamp will flash.

Instruments
114
L
The flashing will last for ten seconds and
then repeat every 30 seconds for
approximately five minutes or until the
belt(s) is fastened or the vehicle stops.
If the warning indicator stays ON with the
seat belt(s) fastened, report the fault to a
Jaguar Dealer. It is safe to drive the
vehicle with the light ON, provided that
the seat belt(s) is properly fastened.
Ensure that all occupants seat belts are
fastened before driving.
Note: If a heavy object is placed on the
front passenger seat it may activate the
Beltminder feature. It is recommended
that the object be placed in the luggage
compartment.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
(Amber)
!WARNING:
If the ABS and brake warning
indicators are ON at the same time, do
not drive the vehicle until the fault is
rectified. Consult a Jaguar Dealer
immediately.
Illuminates if a fault has been
detected in the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) or the electric
parkbrake system. A warning message
will appear to indicate either ABS or
parkbrake fault.
The brake system will continue to function
normally, but without ABS braking.
If the indicator lamp comes on or stays on
after the bulb check cycle, the vehicle
should be driven to a Jaguar Dealer at the
earliest opportunity.
Active front lighting (Amber)
Illuminates when there is a
system fault. Report the fault to
a Jaguar Dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine malfunction (Amber)
Illuminates when the ignition
system is ON and remains on
until the engine is started.
If the indicator comes on when the engine
is running then there is an engine
malfunction.
Specialised diagnostic equipment is
required to repair such faults. Report the
fault to a Jaguar Dealer.
The vehicle may go to limp-home mode,
with the possibility of reduced engine
performance. Drive with caution.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
(Amber)
The indicator will flash twice
every second when DSC is
operating.
The message DSC NOT AVAILABLE will
be displayed and the indicator lamp will
be ON continuously if a fault is detected.
When Trac DSC is selected the message
TRAC DSC is displayed for four seconds
and the warning indicator remains
illuminated.
DSC OFF (normally aspirated engines
only): If the system is turned OFF, a
message DSC OFF will be displayed at all
times and the warning indicator will
remain ON.
When the system is turned back ON the
warning indicator goes out and a
message DSC ON will be displayed for
four seconds.

115
Instruments
R
Rear fog lamp (Amber)
Illuminates when the rear fog
lamp is switched ON.
Adaptive cruise control (Amber)
Illuminates when adaptive
cruise control is active to
indicate that the vehicle is in
follow mode.
Forward alert (Amber)
Illuminates when Forward Alert
is active.
Air Bag (Amber)
Flashes if the air bag system or
the Roll Over Protection
System (Convertible only)
develops a fault. Then illuminates
permanently until the fault has been
diagnosed and cleared.
Report the fault to a Jaguar Dealer
immediately.
Tire pressure monitoring system
(Yellow)
Illuminates when one or more
tires are significantly under
inflated. The vehicle should be
stopped as soon as possible and the tires
checked and inflated to the
recommended pressure.
High beam (Blue)
Illuminates when the high beam
is switched ON or flashed ON.
Automatic speed limiter (Green)
Illuminates when automatic
speed limiter is active.
Front fog lamp (Green)
Illuminates when the front fog
lamps are switched ON.
Side lamps (Green)
Illuminates when the side
(parking) lamps are switched
ON.
Direction indicators (Green)
The appropriate indicator will
flash when the column stalk is
moved up or down to signal a
turn. If a direction indicator fails, the
audible ticking and lamp will sound and
flash at twice normal rate when that
indicator is selected.
Hazard warning lights
When the hazard warning switch is used,
both direction indicator tell-tales flash
simultaneously.

Instruments
116
L
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Various sounds are produced for warning and notification purposes as follows:
Hazard or Condition Chime or tone/remedy
External lights remain
ON when the driver’s
door is opened.
A chime will sound until the lights are switched OFF or
driver’s door is closed. The chime will not sound if the
lighting control is in AUTO position.
Hazard warning
indicators ON.
A ticking will sound until the hazard indicators are switched
OFF.
Direction indicators ON. A ticking will sound until the indicators are switched OFF.
Memory 1, 2 or 3
configuration saved.
A short tone as the memory selection is saved.
Air bag system failure. A tone sequence is repeated five times. Report the fault to
a Jaguar Dealer as soon as possible.
Seat belt reminder. A chime will sound until an unfastened seat belt is
fastened. The warning will cease if all the front seats are
occupied and the seat belts are buckled, the vehicle is
brought to a halt, the ignition is turned OFF or more than
approximately five minutes has elapsed with the vehicle in
motion, the ignition on and an occupied seat’s belt
unbuckled.
Electric parkbrake. If the parkbrake is applied whilst the vehicle is moving a
continuous chime is initiated; release the parkbrake. If
there is a fault with the system which would prevent the
application of the parkbrake, a brief sequence of chimes is
initiated.
Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Driver intervene
and Forward Alert.
Multiple chime. Apply the brakes.
ACC low speed
automatic switch off.
A chime will sound to indicate that the ACC system is no
longer operating.
Speed is over 15 km/h
(9 mph) above the set
limit speed.
A short warning chime.Reduce speed.
Gear selector is not in
Park with ignition OFF.
A chime will sound. Select Park.
Convertible roof starting
to open or close.
High-pitched single chime.

117
Instruments
R
The Jaguar Smart Key
cannot be detected.
A chime will sound. The remote handset should be inserted
into the starter control unit, see page 37.
The Jaguar Smart Key
is to be removed from
the starter control unit.
A chime will sound for 60 seconds if the Jaguar Smart
Key is in the starter control unit and the driver’s door is
opened. The remote handset should be removed from the
starter control unit.
DSC OFF (Normally
aspirated engines only)
A chime will sound.

Information Displays
118
L
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION
The driver information centre display
panel is situated within the instrument
cluster between the tachometer and
speedometer gauges.
The information centre is active as soon
as a door is opened for access.
The primary function of the message
centre is to inform the driver of the
following:
•warning messages
•temporary alert messages
•information messages.
The message centre screen is divided into
various zones displaying the following:
1. Gear selection, automatic or manual.
2. Speed control related information.
3. Priority warning indicators.
4. Warning messages, red or amber, if
system faults are detected. Status
messages are displayed to indicate
changes in state of certain vehicle
functions, e.g. navigation, telephone.
The clock can be shown when no
other information is required to be
displayed, see page 142.
5. Trip computer information, including
total distance covered by the vehicle,
see page 119.
6. Set trip computer information display
relating to A, B or Auto trip computer,
see page 119.
7. The fuel level gauge, which changes
colour from blue to red when the fuel
level drops to the reserve fuel level
indicator. The small arrow on the top
of the fuel pump symbol denotes
which side of the vehicle the fuel filler
cap is located.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
!WARNING:
If a red warning indicator is displayed,
stop the vehicle as soon as possible
when it is safe to do so.
Most messages, when displayed have an
associated warning light, red or amber,
which will come on to indicate the
message priority. Also from time to time
information messages will be displayed.
If more than one message is active, each
is displayed in turn for two seconds in
order of priority.
Messages take priority over the trip
computer data and will be displayed
when the ignition is in the convenience
mode, see page 42.
MILES
10849
A :
238.7
SETSPEED MPH
55
JAG0204N
1
2
4
5
6
7
3

119
Information Displays
R
Note: The message centre information
messages and their meanings are detailed
within the appropriate subject sections.
TRIP COMPUTER
The computer memory stores data for a
journey or series of journeys until it is
reset to zero.
The displayed information is for guidance
only, as it can be affected by traffic, road
and weather conditions.
Three independent memories are
available, A, B and Auto. A and B
memories can be set independently, while
the Auto trip will reset after every ignition
cycle as the vehicle moves.
Full trip computer information for the trip
memories can be displayed on the vehicle
touch-screen located in the centre
console, while current selected trip
computer information is displayed on the
instrument cluster message centre.
To access the trip computer touch-screen
settings:
•From the main Home touch-screen
menu, select Vehicle.
•Select Trip computer.
•Select requirements from the menu.
A system flow chart is given on page 128.
Trip computer message centre display
Vehicle total distance travelled 1, trip
distance 2 are displayed as well as,
average fuel economy and average speed
if selected via the touch-screen. Also A, B
or Auto will be displayed, depending on
the current memory selected.
Odometer
The odometer shows the total vehicle
distance travelled since the vehicle was
new.
The odometer and trip distance reading is
displayed in either miles or kilometres,
depending on the units selected via the
touch-screen, see page 128.
Changing the display
Press the TRIP button on the end of the
left column stalk switch repeatedly to
display the message centre data in the
following order:
•trip distance
•average speed
•average fuel consumption
•range.
Trip distance (A, B and Auto)
Distance travelled since the last memory
reset. The maximum trip reading is 16,090
kilometres (9,999.9 miles). The computer
will automatically reset to zero if this
distance is exceeded.
MILES
10849
A :
238.7
JAG0532N
1
2
JAG0049G

Information Displays
120
L
Average fuel consumption (A, B and
Auto)
The average fuel consumption, litres per
100 kilometres, miles per litre or miles per
gallon, based on the accumulated
distance travelled and the accumulated
fuel used.
Range
This shows the predicted distance, miles
or kilometres, that the vehicle should
travel on the remaining fuel, assuming
average fuel economy and fuel
consumption stay constant.
Average speed (A, B and Auto)
The average speed since the last press of
the reset button.
ML/km (also Miles/litre)
The distance display of imperial or metric
units is selected via the touch-screen, see
page 128.
Display language
The the display language is selected via
the touch-screen, see page 128.
Reset
The resetting of the trip memories is
carried out via the touch-screen, see
page 128.

121
Information Displays
R
TOUCH-SCREEN
Note: Information operation is given in the
Information Displays, page 118, which
incorporates the systems controlled via
the touch-screen.
Note: When the engine is stopped, for the
touch-screen to remain active, press the
engine START/STOP button again
without pressing the brake pedal (ignition
system ON).
1. Touch-screen: When initially
activated, the touch-screen will
display the main Home screen. From
this main Home screen all
touch-screen facilities and operations
are initiated by pressing the relevant
system touch-screen buttons and
icons.
2. Touch-screen ON/OFF: Press once
to turn the screen ON, press again to
revert to screen-saver mode. A further
press will turn the touch-screen OFF.
When the engine Start/Stop button is
pressed, the touch-screen is
activated by the ON/OFF switch on
the touch-screen console.
3. HOME screen button: Press to return
to the main HOME screen page from
all facilities.
System facilities
There are five major systems controlled
via the touch-screen with their individual
levels of operation and settings. They are
as follows:
•Audio: Radio display AM/FM, CD.
•Climate: Air conditioning,
Distribution, Seats, Heated steering
wheel, Automatic air recirculation.
•Phone: Digit dialler, Phone book, Last
ten calls (made, received, missed).
•Navigation: Destination, Stored
locations, Navigation setup, Route
options. Refer to navigation
handbook.
•Vehicle: Security, Parking, Valet
mode, Trip computer, Clock,
Brightness, Contrast, System
settings, Vehicle settings, Display
settings.
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
12 : 26 pm
73 70
F F
62
F
.0 .5
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
Valet
JAG0007NAS
32
1

Information Displays
122
L
Touch-screen use
!WARNING:
In the interest of road safety, only
operate, adjust or view the system
when it is safe to do so.
Caution: Always run the engine during
prolonged use of the touch-screen.
Failure to do so may discharge the
vehicle battery, preventing the engine
from starting.
When the engine START/STOP button is
pressed, the touch-screen can be
activated by the ON/OFF switch on the
touch-screen console.
The buttons surrounding the
touch-screen display are referred to as
hard buttons and should be pressed
firmly. The touch-screen buttons are soft
buttons and only require a short, light
pressure to function. Do not use
excessive pressure.
When operating touch-screen buttons,
always extend the tip of one finger, and
withhold the thumb and remaining fingers
from the screen. Touching the screen with
more than one finger at a time may cause
false inputs.
Throughout the handbook, the expression
Select an item (or similar wording) means
touch the on-screen button to select or
alter the required item.
The handbook shows the on-screen
menus, explains how to operate the
controls and illustrates how to select or
alter settings and requirements. After
becoming familiar with the controls,
follow the on-screen menus and prompts,
to operate the system as required.
Where it is thought that guidance through
the touch-screen menus is necessary,
additional information has been given
within that section or subject.
Touch-screen display icons
Touch-screen display icons are as
follows, (they may not all be displayed at
the same time):
Return to the previous screen
displayed.
Warning triangle button
indicating a warning pop-up
message. Touch the pop-up to
cancel. The warning message will be
displayed on the message centre screen.
Telephone: send button.
Telephone: end call.
Page up or increase setting to
required value.
Page down or decrease setting
to required value.
Direct access to the valet mode
setting screen.
Telephone signal strength
indicator.
Telephone battery charge
indicator.
No phone connected.
Valet

123
Information Displays
R
Touch-screen care
Caution: Care must be taken to avoid
spilling or splashing drinks onto the
touch-screen.
Do not use any abrasive cleaners to clean
your touch-screen. For approved screen
cleaners, contact your Jaguar Dealer.
The touch-screen inner bezel must be
kept clean to maintain optimum
performance. Finger marks and attracted
dust should be regularly removed using a
soft cloth and Jaguar approved cleaning
agent.
Where possible, avoid exposing the
touch-screen to direct sunlight for long
periods.
PERSONALISED SETTINGS
General Information
The touch-screen provides touch-control
of the vehicle Audio, Climate, Phone,
Navigation and Vehicle systems, as fitted.
Note: When the vehicle engine is stopped
the touch-screen reverts to the stand-by
mode. To activate the touch-screen press
the engine Start/Stop button again.
Home screen display
When initially activated, the touch-screen
will display the main Home screen. The
Home screen may also be displayed at
any time by pressing the Home button on
the screen surround.
Screen settings: The touch-screen
brightness and contrast can be set to
individual requirements, including
dimming for night driving. This is
accessed via the Vehicle settings system.
Select Cont./Bright.
Select Day or Auto dimming
Day: Brightness and contrast can be
adjusted to personal requirements by
selecting the (+)or (-) buttons.
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Valet
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
JAG0206NAS
Vehicle
Off
On
Auto dimming
Trip computer
Clock adjust
Cont./Bright.
Syst. settings
Veh. settings
Brightness
Contrast
12 : 26 pm
JAG0207NAS
Vehicle
Off
On
Auto dimming
Trip computer
Clock adjust
Cont./Bright.
Syst. settings
Veh. settings
Brightness
Contrast
12 : 26 pm
JAG0208NAS

Information Displays
124
L
Auto: Select either On or Off. Brightness
and contrast are automatically adjusted
by the ambient light level. As the light level
decreases the touch-screen brightness
will decrease until the full night screen
level of brightness is initiated.
Further adjustment of the touch-screen
brightness can be achieved by using the
(+) or (-) buttons in the Cont./Bright
screen or by adjustment of the instrument
panel dimmer switch, see page 140.
Pop-up messages
The operation of certain functions will
cause a small message, pop-up, to
appear overlaying the touch-screen
display.
The pop-up is mainly for information and
will disappear automatically after a few
seconds, or can be dismissed by
touching the pop-up screen area.
If any action or adjustment is required the
message will clearly indicate what is
required and which button to touch.
Touch-screen systems
There are five major systems controlled
via the touch-screen with their individual
levels of operation and settings. They are
as follows:
•Audio
•Climate
•Phone
•Navigation
•Vehicle.
Audio system
The vehicle audio system interacts with
Navigation, In-car Telephone and Climate
Control systems.
The audio system, see page 184, can be
controlled from the switches on the
touch-screen console, the touch-screen
buttons and from the multi-function
controls on the left-hand side of the
steering wheel.
The system structure is shown as a flow
chart on page 127.
Automatic climate control
The automatic climate control system,
see page 132, can be controlled from the
touch-screen buttons.
Phone
The communications system is
composed of the following facilities:
•phone
•digit dialler
•phone book
•last ten calls made, received, missed.
The telephone system, see page 210, is
controlled from the touch-screen and the
multi-function controls on the left-hand
side of the steering wheel.
Navigation system
See the Navigation Handbook for detailed
information on the operation of the
navigation system.
Audio
Sound
Options
PTY
On
OnOff
Off
Audio
Cancel
AutoStore
Please wait..
Settings
12 : 26 pm
JAG0209NAS

125
Information Displays
R
Vehicle system
The following system functions are set
using the touch-screen:
•trip computer
•clock adjust
•contrast and brightness
•system settings
•vehicle settings.
The system structure is shown as a flow
chart on page 127.
Languages and distance units
The screen text and distance units are
available in various languages and either
Imperial or Metric units respectively.
The required languages and units are
accessed by selecting Vehicle on the
main system Home screen, then
selecting:
•Trip computer
•Units change
•Preferences and then selecting from
the menu.
To change the units: The unit choices
are selected by pressing the buttons
either - km, km/h l/100 or Mls. MPH
MPG.
Temperature display is selected by
pressing either °° °C or °°F.
Note: Celsius or Fahrenheit may be
selected independently of metric or
Imperial units.
To change the language: The language
choices are displayed as a list. Scroll up
or down through the list using the up or
down arrows.
Note: The navigation system is not
affected by the language change. To
change the navigation system language
display, refer to the Navigation Handbook.
Vehicle
Display set
Preferences
Button audio
Mls. MPH MPG
km km/h 1/100
F
C
0
0
Display language
English US
Vol. presets
Change
12 : 26 pm
JAG0210NAS
Vehicle
Display set
Preferences
Button audio
Mls. MPH MPG
km km/h 1/100
F
C
0
0
Display language
English UK
Vol. presets
Change
Vehicle
Dutch
Danish
Finnish
French
Norwegian
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0211NAS

Information Displays
126
L
Timeout to home screen
The Timeout to home screen (return to
display the Home screen) can be
adjusted.
From the main Home screen select the
Vehicle button.
1 Select the Syst. settings button.
Select Display set 2 followed by Timeout
to home screen either On or Off 3. Using
the slider bar the time out can be adjusted
from 10 seconds to five minutes.
Note: An initial default setting of one
minute is set if no time adjustment is
made.
Vehicle
Trip B
Auto
Reset
Unit Ch
Distance
Av. speed
Av. fuel
500 miles
35 MPH
23 MPG
300 miles
Range
Clock adjust
Cont./Bright.
Trip computer
Syst. settings
Veh. settings
Trip A
12 : 26 pm
JAG0231NAS
Vehicle
Display set.
Preferences
Button audio
Vol. presets
12 : 26 PM
50 seconds
Screensaver set.
Timeout to home
screen
On
Off
3
2
JAG0544NAS

127
Information Displays
R
Menu structure
The following menu outlines represent the touch-screen Audio, Vehicle and
Telephone system structure.
Audio
AM/FM
CD Settings
Sound
Base
Treb le
Balance
Fade
Options
AF
REG (Regionalisation)
EON (Extended Other Networks)
FM text
PTY (Choose from itemised list)
AM/FM
CD
Settings
Sound
Base
Treb le
Balance
Fade
Options
CD text

Information Displays
128
L
Vehicle
Trip computer
Clock adjust Trip A
Cont./Bright Distance
Syst. settings Av speed
Veh. settings Av fuel
Range
Reset
Trip B
Distance
Av speed
Av fuel
Range
Reset
Auto
Distance
Av speed
Av fuel
Range
Add/Delete trip
Units
Display set
Screen saver
Time out to home screen
Preferences
Units (Change from Metric to Imperial)
Display language
Button audio
Audible
Vol. presets
Facilities volume set
AVC (Automatic volume control)

129
Information Displays
R
Trip computer
Clock adjust
Cont./Bright Adjust time
Syst. settings Clock display
Veh. settings 12/24 hour
Set
Trip computer
Clock adjust
Cont./Bright
Syst. settings Day
Veh. settings Auto
Brightness
Contrast
Trip computer
Clock adjust
Cont./Bright
Syst. settings
Veh. settings Display set
Screen saver
Time out to home screen
Preferences
Units (Change from Metric to Imperial)
Display language
Button audio
Audible (On/Off)
Vol. presets
Facilities volume set
AVC (Automatic volume control)

Information Displays
130
L
Trip c ompu ter
Clock adjust
Cont./Bright
Syst. settings
Veh. settings
Security
2 stage unlock
Drive away locking
Parking
Reverse mirror dip
Valet mode
(Enter a PIN security number)
Phone
Phone
DigiDial Make a call
Names Name search
Last 10
Made
Received
Missed
Settings
Register
Undock
Change phone
Search new

131
Information Displays
R
Voicemail Enter voicemail No.
Answer options
Auto answer
Caller announce
Phone options
Ringtones
Phone ringtone
Jaguar ringtone
Phonebook
Auto download
Erase entire book
Refresh book

Climate Control
132
L
Climate Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
!WARNING:
Do not disconnect any pipes in the air
conditioning refrigeration system. A
refrigerant is used which can cause
blindness if allowed to contact the
eyes. If refrigerant should contact the
eyes or skin, wash the eyes or affected
area with cold water for several
minutes. Do not rub. As soon as
possible thereafter, obtain treatment
from a doctor or eye specialist.
The climate control panel is located in the
centre console. There are two control
facilities:
•A dedicated control panel located
below the audio and CD panel for
operation of basic features.
•A touch control and display unit for
additional functions and personal
settings.
The climate control system features
automatic temperature and air
distribution control, which is programmed
to maintain optimum levels of comfort
within the vehicle in all but the most
severe conditions.
While the controls can be adjusted
manually to satisfy individual
requirements, allowing the system to
function automatically (in AUTO mode) is
by the simplest method of operation and
is preferable in most operating
conditions.
In Auto mode air recirculation
sensor detects pollutants and
selects air recirculation when
the level of pollution outside the vehicle
reaches a certain level. The sensor
response level can be adjusted on the
touch-screen.
Once the level of pollutants decreases, air
recirculation will switch off.
To set the automatic air recirculation
sensitivity level of the pollution sensor:
•From the Climate Control home
screen select Settings.
•Adjust the automatic air recirculation
sensitivity setting as required by
selecting the (+) or (-) buttons.
Use of air conditioning
Note: To prevent humidity build up inside
the vehicle and possible screen misting,
avoid driving with the air conditioning
system off or in manual air recirculation for
prolonged periods.
Air conditioning is an integral part of the
climate control system, providing cooled
and dehumidified air for occupant
comfort. The dry airflow is also effective in
preventing misting of the windows.
While the air conditioner can be manually
switched off, it is recommended that it is
used in all climatic conditions throughout
the year, preferably in AUTO mode.

133
Climate Control
R
Close all windows and the convertible top
when the air conditioning is on to ensure
satisfactory operation.
•If the air conditioning system is not
used frequently, it should be run
briefly at least once each week, with a
cold setting. This will prevent the
seals from drying out with subsequent
refrigerant leaks.
•Surplus water produced by the
dehumidifying process is expelled
from the system via drain tubes
beneath the vehicle. This may result in
a small pool of water forming on the
road when the vehicle is stationary
and is not a cause for concern.

Climate Control
134
L
AIR VENTS
The air vents provide fresh or heated air to
the interior of the vehicle. Ensure that the
air intake grille at the base of the
windshield is kept clear of any
obstruction.
Air flow and direction can be adjusted
with the thumbwheel controls 1 and
direction vanes 2.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL
Automatic climate control provides
efficient regulation of the vehicle
environment without constant
adjustments from the occupant.
Sensors inside the vehicle monitor
temperature, humidity 3 and direct
sunlight 4. Do not obstruct these
openings. In response to sensor
indications, the electronic control system
automatically adjusts the heat input,
blower speed, air intake and airflow
distribution to maintain the selected
temperature(s) and reduce misting.
Automatic operation provides optimum
comfort under most driving conditions.
It is recommended that automatic
control, AUTO, is selected as the
normal operating mode.
Automatic control, AUTO, can be
overridden at any time.
JAG0508N
4
1
2
1
2
2 2 13 1

135
Climate Control
R
Centre console control panel
1. Rear screen heat.
2. Temperature decrease, left-hand
zone.
3. Temperature increase, left-hand zone.
4. Air recirculation and fresh air.
5. AUTO climate control knob.
6. Blower speed rotary control.
7. Temperature decrease, right-hand
zone.
8. Temperature increase, right-hand
zone.
9. Windshield defrost and demist.
10. Climate control main touch-screen.
Panel illumination
The illumination level is adjusted by the
common instrument panel dimmer
control, refer to page 140.
To switch the climate control on
With the ignition system ON, press the
AUTO rotary control knob in the centre of
the centre console control panel. The
system will switch on in the auto
operating mode. The control knob LED
indicator will be illuminated.
Note: It is advisable to allow the system to
stabilise before making large changes to
the temperature setting, particularly at the
start of a journey, refer to Temperature
selection.
To switch the climate control off
The system can be turned OFF only from
the options on the Climate touch-screen,
see page 137.
Settings
Temp. sync.
External
12 : 26 PM
62
F
Auto
Left Right
71 70
F .0 F
Auto
Econ
Climate
.5
Auto
Climate
10
JAG0496NAS
37
10
4
5
28
6
1

Climate Control
136
L
AUTO mode
Automatic operation provides a
controlled environment over a
temperature range of 16°C to 28°C
(59°F to 83°F)17°C to 31°C (61°F to 89°F)
and should be regarded as the normal
operating mode.
To select automatic climate control press
the AUTO button, the LED illuminates to
confirm selection.
Select the required temperature.
Front and rear screen heating and timed
air recirculation may be selected in AUTO
mode. Selecting any other control will
cancel AUTO operation. The control knob
LED indicator will be extinguished.
Temperature selection
Separate controls allow the driver and
passenger zone temperatures to be
independently adjusted. Press the red
buttons to increase temperature and the
blue buttons to decrease temperature.
Both driver and passenger temperatures
are displayed on the touch-screen.
Pressing the driver’s buttons to select the
maximum or minimum temperature
settings causes the display to change to
HI or LO respectively and cancel AUTO
mode.
To quickly jump from HI or LO to a
convenient mid range temperature
of 22°C (72°F)22°C (72°F), press and hold
AUTO for a few seconds.
Air recirculation
Caution: Prolonged operation with
recirculation selected and setting the
automatic air recirculation sensor to a
needlessly high level in cold and damp
conditions, could result in interior
screen misting.
Press the recirculation button to select air
recirculation. Selection is indicated by the
screen symbol and the button LED
illuminating.
To deselect air recirculation, press the
recirculation button again, or select
AUTO.
Note: When air recirculation is selected,
the sound of the airflow will change, this is
normal.
Windshield defrost and demist
To remove frost or heavy misting from the
windshield, press the DEF button.
•The blower switches on automatically
at a high level speed but the speed
can be adjusted manually if required.
•Air conditioning switches on
automatically (to dehumidify the air)
and cannot be deselected.
•Recirculation is cancelled and cannot
be selected.
•The front screen heater and the rear
screen heater and door mirror heaters
switch on automatically, provided the
engine is running.

137
Climate Control
R
•The button LED illuminates.
To deselect defrost mode, press AUTO or
press the DEF button again.
Rear heated screen
The screen heater may be switched on
and off in any mode, including system off,
but only operates when the engine is
running.
The rear screen and door mirror heaters
switch off automatically after 21 minutes.
The screen heater may be manually
deselected during the timed period using
the push buttons.
In cold ambient conditions, at the start of
a journey, the rear screen heater will
switch on automatically for the timed
period, it will come on below-1°C (30°F).
Air conditioning
Press the AUTO rotary control knob to
turn the air conditioning on.
The air conditioning system is controlled
automatically in AUTO mode to maintain
the desired temperature and humidity
(even if higher temperature settings are
selected).
The air conditioning system is also
switched on automatically in defrost
mode (DEF) in order to dehumidify the air.
Blower speed
Set the blower speed as required by
adjusting the AUTO rotary control knob.
When operating in AUTO mode, blower
speed is controlled automatically and
AUTO is displayed on the touch-screen.
Any adjustment of the knob will cancel
AUTO mode.
Note: In AUTO mode, the blower only
operates at low speed, if heating is
required, until the engine is warm.
Heated seats and steering wheel
The heated seats and steering wheel can
be controlled only from the climate screen
options on the touch-screen. See pages
61 and 63 respectively.
Touch-screen operation
The climate control touch-screen is
controlled via the Home touch-screen.
Press the Climate button on the Home
touch-screen.
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Valet
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
JAG0011NAS

Climate Control
138
L
The climate control main view is
displayed, from which the climate control
settings can be set.
Climate control display icons
The climate control display buttons and
icons are as follows:
Auto climate control ON.
Distribution to windshield.
Distribution to face.
Distribution to feet.
Synchronizes the driver and passenger
climate control zones.
Blower speed control decrease and
increase.
Access to the Settings control
touch-screen to adjust personal climate
zone settings, also access to the
automatic air recirculation sensor control
setting.
Econ ON/OFF. Economy mode turns off
the air conditioning compressor and
reduces power consumed by the climate
control system which will reduce air
conditioning performance. Econ mode
can be turned OFF only from the climate
screen options on the touch-screen.
Prolonged use may cause the windows to
mist.
Climate ON/OFF button.
External temperature
The external temperature is displayed at
the top of the climate touch-screen zone.
Settings
Temp. sync.
External
62
F
Auto
Left Right
71 70
F .0 F
Auto
Econ
Climate
.5
Auto
Climate
12 : 26 pm
JAG0216NAS
Auto
Temp. sync.
Settings
Econ
Climate

147
Convertible Top
R
Convertible Top
OPENING THE CONVERTIBLE
TOP
!WARNING:
•Before opening or closing the
convertible top, ensure that all
occupants have moved their hands,
fingers, hair, etc. clear of moving
parts.
•Do not place items on the tonneau
panel or over the Rollover
Protection Device covers.
The power operated convertible top and
rear quarter windows, see page 88, are
controlled by the switch located on the
overhead console. The ignition system
must be ON, see page 50. The top will
latch and unlatch automatically. The top
can be operated at speeds below
24 km/h (15 mph), however, for safety it
should not be opened or closed when the
vehicle is being driven.
Caution:
•The convertible top, will not
operate unless the luggage
separator is correctly located in the
deployed position in the luggage
compartment, see page 150 and
that the luggage compartment lid is
firmly closed.
•Check that there is nothing in the
rear area which could interfere with
the top when folding down, e.g.
ensure that the battery cover trim is
fitted and secure.
•Do not attempt to operate the
convertible top at temperatures
below –15°C (5°F). This may cause
damage to the fabric.
•If the convertible top is operated
above 24km/h (15 mph) to
excessive speeds there is a risk of
damage to the convertible top.
•Do not attempt to OPEN the
convertible top manually, as
damage to the linkage mechanism
may occur.
1. Ensure that the ignition system is in
the ON condition.
2. Ensure that the luggage separator in
the luggage compartment is in the
fully deployed position. If it is not
positioned correctly the proximity
switches will not operate and the
convertible top will not open, see
page 151.
JAG0486N

Convertible Top
148
L
3.
Press and hold the rear of the
overhead console switch. (Do not
release the switch until the top is fully
open.).
4.
The rear quarter windows open,
an audible warning sounds, and the
top unlatches and starts to move, the
tonneau closing panel opens. (The
front windows will fully open. The door
window switch will require to be
pressed to close the window.).
5.
When the top is fully open, the audible
warning sounds again. The tonneau
closing panel is fully automated and
encloses the convertible top in the
stowed position.
6. Release the overhead console switch.
Note: If at any period during the
convertible top opening sequence the
switch is released, all movement of the
convertible top will cease.
Caution: Do not at any time during the
opening or closing of the convertible
top press the engine START/STOP
button as all movement will cease and
the convertible top will have to be
manually re-set.
Convertible top manual re-set
!WARNING:
It is advisable that two persons carry
out this procedure so that the
convertible top and tonneau cover are
fully supported when required;
although it is possible that this
procedure may be carried out by one
person with care.
To manually re-set the convertible top:
Ensure that the engine is not running and
that the ignition system is OFF.
JAG00487N
JAG0240G
JAG0241G
JAG0246G

149
Convertible Top
R
Grasp the sides of the section, as shown,
and pulling sharply. Remove the Allen key
from its stowed position.
From inside the luggage compartment,
remove the vent screen to access the
operating pump.
Insert the Allen key into the pump and
rotate counter clockwise (approximately
one turn).
The convertible top and tonneau cover
movement can cease in any of the
positions 1, 2 or 3, as shown.
If the movement ceases in position 1,
release the tension in the convertible top
cover and tension bow (rear of convertible
top) by lifting the front of the convertible
top and pulling rearwards A.
Lift the tension bow upwards B, and
forwards to clear the tonneau cover).
JAG0247G
JAG0248G
JAG0420G
1
2
3
JAG0421G
A
B

Convertible Top
150
L
Lift the tonneau cover fully and support C.
Pull the convertible top rearwards and
downwards D so that it is fully stowed.
Rest the tonneau cover in the closed
position E.
If the movement ceases in either positions
2 or 3, lift the tonneau cover fully upright
and support C, pull the front of the
convertible top rearwards and
downwards so that it is fully stowed D.
Rest the tonneau cover in the closed
position E.
All positions: Turn the Allen key
clockwise approximately one turn and
return it to its stowed position, refit the
rear seat centre section, luggage
compartment vent screen and close the
luggage compartment lid.
Switch ON the ignition system and start
the engine. Press and hold the front of the
convertible top switch until the
convertible top is closed and fully latched.
If the convertible top requires to be open,
press and hold the rear of the switch.
Preparation for Winter
Before the onset of Winter, it is advisable
to coat the convertible top seals and
respective body seals with a compound,
such as Carbaflo KSP 105, to aid
operation in freezing conditions.
This action will need to be repeated at the
start of each Winter to maintain
protection.
Care must be taken so that the compound
does not come into contact with the
convertible top material. For further
advise you should contact your Jaguar
Dealer.
Luggage separator
Caution: Luggage items should not be
placed forward or on top of the luggage
separator as it could cause damage to
the separator.
A luggage separator is located in the
luggage compartment to prevent items
from moving into the area where the
convertible top is to be stowed.
When the convertible top is closed, the
normal position for the luggage separator
is in the retracted position with the
partition positioned vertically.
JAG0422G
C
D
E
JAG0242G

151
Convertible Top
R
To deploy the luggage separator
Caution: Do not place large objects
underneath the luggage separator
partition when deployed as damage to
the convertible top may occur.
Pull the handle on the luggage separator
towards you. There is a lug on either side
of the luggage separator: slide the lugs
into the sliders on either side of the
luggage compartment. The luggage
separator will positively locate in the
vertical position. A proximity switch, 1, is
located in the separator assembly so that
the convertible top will not open and
retract until the separator is in the fully
deployed position.
When selected, if the convertible top does
not open, the positioning of the luggage
separator should be checked and ensure
that the luggage compartment lid is firmly
closed.
To remove the luggage separator
With the luggage separator in the
normally stowed position, pull the handle
towards you, 1 and disengage the lugs
from the sliders 2.
Holding the centre of the main body of the
luggage separator, rotate upwards 3,
disengaging the main body of the luggage
separator from the support brackets.
Remove the luggage separator and
retract the withdrawn partition section of
the luggage separator into the main body.
JAG0243G
1
JAG0244G
1
2
3

Convertible Top
152
L
To install the luggage separator
With the partition slightly extracted,
position the luggage separator up to the
support brackets with the front edge
raised. Ensuring, that for both sides, the
catch 1 will engage in the locating slot 2.
Rotate the main body of the luggage
separator 3 so that it sits down into the
support brackets. Fit the partition lugs
into the sliders 4 and retract the luggage
separator partition into the normal
stowage position.
CLOSING THE CONVERTIBLE
TOP
1. Ensure that the ignition system is in
the ON condition.
2. Press and hold the front of the
overhead console switch, see page
147. (Do not release the switch until
the convertible top is fully closed and
latched, and if required the rear
quarter windows and front door
windows are fully closed.).
3. If the front windows are in any other
position than fully down, they will
retract to the fully down position on
pressing the closure switch. As the
convertible top starts to move the
audible warning will sound.
4. When the top is fully closed and
latched, the audible warning sounds
again and the rear quarter windows
will close followed by the front door
windows returning to the fully closed
position.
Note: If at any period during the
convertible top closure sequence the
switch is released, all movement of the
convertible top will cease.
1
JAG0245G
2
3
4

153
Convertible Top
R
Manual closure of the convertible top
If necessary, the convertible top can be
closed manually, as follows:
Grasp the sides of the section, as shown,
and pull sharply. Remove the Allen key
from its stowed position.
From inside the luggage compartment,
remove the vent screen to access the
operating pump.
Insert the Allen key into the pump and
rotate counter clockwise (approximately
one turn).
Pull the tonneau release cable, until fully
extended. Close the luggage
compartment lid.
Fully open the tonneau panel. It will
self-support when fully opened.
JAG0246G
JAG0247G
JAG0248G
JAG0249G
JAG0250G

Convertible Top
154
L
From the left-hand side of the vehicle,
place your right hand down the side of the
folded convertible top. Ensure that the
bottom of the convertible top, which
includes the tension bow, is securely
held. Securely hold the convertible top
header assembly with your left hand. With
both hands pull the whole of the
convertible top up and forward.
Ensure that the tension bow is fully raised.
Supporting the tension bow, lower the
tonneau panel 1. Then lower the tension
bow 2 onto the tonneau panel.
Remove the plug from the convertible top
header trim.
JAG0251G
JAG0252G
1
2
JAG0253G
JAG0254G

155
Convertible Top
R
Support the front header. Insert the Allen
key into the header panel key slot and turn
clockwise until the top is securely latched
and resistance is felt.
Return the Allen key to its stowed
position, refit the rear seat centre section,
luggage compartment vent screen and
the plug into the convertible top header
trim.
Message centre information displays
JAG0255G
Message Warning
Light
Priority
Indicator
Meaning
HOOD NOT LATCHED None Red The convertible roof is not
latched, check for security.
HOOD OUT
OF POSITION
None Amber The convertible roof is not
correctly positioned. Open or
close the convertible roof again
and check for correct
positioning.
LUGGAGE COVER OUT
OF POSITION
None Amber The luggage separator is out of
position and should be checked,
see page 152.

Load Carrying
156
L
Load Carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION
!WARNING:
•(Coupe only): Extreme care must be
taken when closing the luggage
compartment lid when passengers
are travelling in the rear seats.
•Locate heavy loads in the luggage
compartment towards the front of
the vehicle and secure them to stop
them sliding. Loose items can be a
hazard.
•Do not drive with the luggage
compartment open as exhaust
fumes can be drawn into the
passenger compartment.
To prevent permanent damage to the
luggage compartment trim, it is advisable
to distribute luggage weight evenly over
the entire luggage floor area.
LUGGAGE COVER
(Coupe only)
Caution: It is advisable that items are
not placed on the luggage cover.
The luggage cover is removed by
releasing the two latches 1 on either side
of the luggage cover and sliding it
downwards and forwards so that the rear
locating pegs 2 are disengaged from the
trim and body. This will allow the luggage
cover to be completely removed.
To refit the luggage cover first locate the
rear pegs 2. Then from the side of the
vehicle, support the luggage cover and fit
the front catch1, by pressing it firmly
through the cover and closing the catch,
this will hold the luggage cover in place.
Repeat this procedure on the other side of
the vehicle.
JAG0256G
2
1

157
Transmission
R
Chapter 6
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission system is designed to
operate in two distinct modes,
conventional automatic and Jaguar
Sequential Shift.
The automatic modes are accessed by
the gear selector:
•D - Drive - automatic shifting.
•S - Sport - sport automatic shifting.
The Jaguar Sequential Shift mode
enables sequential manual gear selection
in D (temporary) and S (permanent)
modes via the steering wheel mounted
paddles.
Note: In addition to the standard shift
patterns available in D and S, the
transmission will adapt to differing driving
conditions by modifying shift points based
upon vehicle sensor information for road
gradient, cornering, braking pressure and
driving style.
Gearshift interlock
!WARNING:
The brake pedal must be applied
before selecting forward or reverse
drive from a stationary position.
A brake pedal and gearshift interlock
system is incorporated in the automatic
gear selector mechanism.
To move the gear selector from Park:
1. Ensure the ignition system is in the
convenience mode or start the
engine.
2. Press the brake pedal.
Gear selection and message centre
indication
The message centre indicates the
position of the gear selector at the top of
the message centre screen. When
automatic selection is made the screen
indicates either P, R, N or D, 1. When S is
selected the indication changes to DS, 2
and if manual selection is made the
indication is from 1 to 6, 3.
P = Park – Use when parked. In this
position the transmission is locked. Do
not select if the vehicle is moving.
R = Reverse – Do not select if the vehicle
is moving forward.
JAG0257G
1
2
3

Transmission
158
L
N = Neutral – Disconnects drive to the
wheels. Use the parkbrake when stopping
temporarily.
D = Drive – All six forward gears are
changed automatically.
S = Sport – All six forward gears are
changed automatically with modified gear
shift points.
Stationary vehicle
When the vehicle is stationary the gear
selector may be left in D, or S, unless the
vehicle is to be parked. When stopping for
extended periods, either select P or apply
the parkbrake and select N.
Shift inhibit
Reverse is inhibited when the vehicle is
moving forward.
Note: Reverse inhibit will not function in
limp-home mode.
Note:
•
The engine is limited to a maximum
speed of 4 500 rev/min. when N or P
is selected.
•
After selecting forward or reverse
drive ranges from N or P, wait briefly
for the transmission to engage before
accelerating.
Automatic operating modes
There are two available automatic modes:
D - Drive: All six gears are changed
automatically. The shift points are
determined by accelerator pedal position
and road speed to provide the best
balance of performance, refinement and
fuel economy for the large majority of
driving conditions.
S - Sport: The transmission operates
automatically, but the gearshift points are
modified to maximise the vehicle
response in demanding driving
conditions. This mode is not suitable for
town or highway cruising.
The automatic modes also offer additional
features:
Kick-down: Is operated when the
accelerator pedal is fully depressed
beyond the normal operating spring
pressure to provide maximum engine
performance. Kick-down is used in
circumstances where rapid acceleration
is required, such as when overtaking.
Kick-down causes the transmission to
change down to the lowest gear possible
to achieve maximum acceleration. The
gear engaged depends on the road speed
at the time of kickdown.
Driver type recognition: The
transmission monitors driving style and in
combination with sensors in the vehicle,
varies the shift schedule, fast-off, corner
recognition and shift adapt under braking
functions proportionally with driving style.
Note: This feature is only active in S -
Sport mode.
Fast-off: Activated when rapidly lifting-off
the accelerator pedal and takes account
of road gradient. This feature inhibits
up-shifts enhancing performance.
Note: This feature will vary its activation,
dependant upon the driver type if S -
Sport is selected.

159
Transmission
R
Shift adapt under braking: Under
braking, the transmission will vary the
down-shift point in proportion to braking
effort and road gradient. This feature is
realised in conjunction with positive
torque, resulting in a smoother
down-shift.
Note: This feature will vary its activation,
dependant upon the driver type if S -
Sport is selected.
Positive torque: Provides throttle blips
on down-shifts under braking, improving
shift feel.
Note: This feature is only active in S -
Sport mode.
Corner recognition: Inhibits up-shifts
during cornering to provide improved
vehicle balance.
Note: This feature will vary its activation,
dependant upon the driver type if S -
Sport is selected.
Road gradient adaption: When the
vehicle is being driven on roads with uphill
gradients, the transmission adapts the
shift pattern to make better use of engine
power.
When driving on roads with long downhill
gradients, the transmission may
automatically select a lower gear to
increase engine braking. Selecting S will
increase the tendency of the transmission
to select a lower gear in these conditions,
further increasing engine braking.
Note: It is also possible to manually select
a lower gear to increase engine braking via
use of the shift paddles.
Cruise control: When cruise control is
active, the transmission selects a shift
pattern to suit cruise control operation,
see page 169.
Dynamic stability control (DSC): When
DSC is switched ON and the system is
activated, the transmission selects a shift
pattern to suit traction control conditions.
Manual operating modes - Jaguar
Sequential Shift
Shifts in the Jaguar Sequential Shift
manual mode are optimised to provide a
rapid response to gear shift requests.
Up-shift requests are optimised for
performance via the short shift function,
this will result in a firmer shift feel than in
automatic modes. Down-shift requests
realise a throttle blip during the shift event
resulting in improved shift feel.
The Jaguar Sequential Shift modes can
be accessed either temporarily or
permanently.
Temporary manual gear selection:
When the gear selector is in the D
position, manual mode may be directly
accessed by the single action of
operating the steering wheel mounted
shift paddles.
This convenience feature allows
immediate but temporary use of the shift
paddles whilst the gear selector is in D.
If continued use of manual mode is
required, the gear selector may be
subsequently moved to the S position to
enter permanent manual mode in the
currently selected gear.
If the gear selector remains in the D
position, temporary manual mode will be
held whilst the driver is accelerating,
decelerating, cornering or continuing to
request shifts via the paddles.

Transmission
160
L
The transmission will revert to automatic
operation after a short period of driving at
steady speed; alternatively the shift-up (+)
paddle may be held for a short period
(approximately one second) to return
directly to automatic operation in D.
Permanent manual gear selection:
Select the S position, permanent manual
mode then is accessed by the operation
of the steering wheel mounted shift
paddles.
The message centre will highlight the
currently selected gear.
To exit from the Jaguar Sequential Shift
permanent manual mode, move the gear
selector to the D position. The
transmission will revert to the D automatic
shift mode.
Manual operation
To shift-up, briefly pull the shift-up (+)
paddle on the right-hand side of the
steering wheel towards you.
To shift-down, briefly pull the shift-down
paddle (-) on the left-hand side of the
steering wheel towards you.
The message centre display will change
to highlight the requested gear.
Note: The transmission will inhibit
up-shifts and down-shifts if the requested
shift would result in an engine speed
outside the normal operating range of the
engine. If this occurs, the message centre
will briefly display the requested gear
selection, but will return to displaying the
current gear.
JAG0258G
JAG0048G

161
Transmission
R
The Jaguar Sequential Shift mode also
has the following features:
Kick-down: Operation of kick-down in
Jaguar Sequential Shift mode will
over-ride the currently selected gear. The
lowest available gear will be selected for
maximum acceleration and will be
highlighted in the message centre display.
Subsequent manual shifts may then be
selected as usual.
Positive torque: Provides throttle blips
on down-shifts, improving shift feel and
response.
Shift assist: The transmission will
automatically up-shift at the engine speed
redline in Jaguar Sequential Shift mode
as if commanded manually.
The transmission will automatically
down-shift when the engine rpm drops
too low for the currently selected gear.
When the vehicle approaches, or comes
to rest, second gear is automatically
selected.
Subsequent pullaways will occur in
second gear, unless the accelerator pedal
demand is high or a down-shift is
manually selected, in which case, first
gear will be selected.
In all cases the message centre will
display the current gear.
Note: If a down-shift is requested which
would normally result in an engine speed
outside the normal operating range during
sustained braking the transmission will
indicate and hold the requested gear in
the message centre display. The
transmission will then commence the
down-shift when the engine speed is
within the normal operating speed.
Limp-home mode
!WARNING:
The driver should be aware that the
vehicle’s performance will be reduced
and must take this into account when
driving. Also the use of the Jaguar
Sequential Shift paddles will be
disabled. In this event consult a Jaguar
Dealer immediately.
In the unlikely event of an electrical or
mechanical failure, transmission
operation will be limited. The vehicle gear
selector ranges P, R, N, D can still be
used to enable the vehicle to be driven to
a safe area.
Message centre display
The message centre may display the
following messages with associated
warning indicators:
ENGINE SYSTEMS FAULT (Red)
RESTRICTED PERFORMANCE (Red or
Amber)
TRANSMISSION FAULT (Amber)
If any of these messages are displayed it
is likely that loss of power or driveability
will be experienced. Seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.
Final drive unit
Caution: Although the final drive unit is
a fill for life unit, if your vehicle is used
for a race event or test track day, then
following the event the final drive unit
lubricant should be changed. Contact
your Jaguar Dealer.

Brakes
162
L
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
!WARNING:
•It remains the driver’s responsibility
to drive safely according to
prevailing conditions.
•The fact that a vehicle is fitted with
ABS must never allow the driver to
be tempted into taking risks which
could affect his or her safety or that
of other road users.
•The addition of ABS cannot
overcome the consequences of
trying to stop in too short a
distance, cornering at too high a
speed, or the risk of aquaplaning.
•The driver should always take road
conditions into account. A slippery
road surface always requires more
braking distance for a given speed,
even with ABS. A possible increase
in stopping distance compared to
locked wheels may occur during
ABS operation on slushy snow,
gravel, sand, or some heavily
corrugated or ridged warning
sections of road surfaces.
This system helps to prevent the road
wheels from locking and skidding during
emergency braking, assisting the driver to
maintain full steering and directional
stability.
The factor controlling ultimate stopping
distance and cornering ability is tire and
road adhesion.
ABS optimises tire to road adhesion
under maximum braking conditions
though it cannot provide increased
cornering ability.
During normal braking the ABS will not be
activated. However, if the braking force
applied begins to exceed tire to road
adhesion the ABS will automatically
activate, preventing the road wheels from
locking.
In these circumstances a pulsating effect
will be felt from the brake pedal indicating
that the system is functioning. The
pulsating effect is due to small
fluctuations in pressure supplied to the
brakes by the system to maintain full tire
and road adhesion.
Under severe braking on some road
surfaces tire noise may be apparent even
though the wheels will at no time become
locked.
ABS monitoring
Caution: Consult a Jaguar Dealer
immediately if the warning light comes
on while driving, a system failure is
indicated.
The ABS control module monitors the
ABS electrical system from ignition switch
ON to ignition system OFF. Any
malfunction will be indicated by the
anti-lock warning light coming on and a
message ABS FAULT will be displayed
by the message centre.
Should a fault develop in the ABS system,
the brake system will still operate
conventionally and with the same
standard of performance as vehicles not
equipped with ABS.

163
Brakes
R
Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)
!WARNING:
The EBA system is an additional safety
system; it is not intended to relieve the
driver of his or her responsibility for
exercising due care and attention when
driving.
The EBA system measures the rate at
which the brake pressure increases. If the
system detects an emergency braking
situation, EBA automatically initiates the
full braking effect. This can reduce
stopping distances in critical situations,
which can help an inexperienced driver to
stop in the same distance as an
experienced driver.
Any malfunction will be indicated by the
message BRAKE ASSIST FAULT
displayed by the message centre.
Increased brake pedal effort may be
required to slow the vehicle. Seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS
For optimum ABS performance these
instructions on braking techniques during
ABS operation should be followed:
•Do not release brake pressure when
the pulsating effect is felt. Maintain a
constant pressure until the
manoeuvre is completed.
•To familiarise yourself with the feel of
the brake pedal during ABS braking,
practise an emergency stop
procedure, always making sure it is
safe to do so. With the seat belts fitted
to all occupants, drive the vehicle at
32 km/h (20 mph) and brake sharply.
•ABS enables the driver to steer
around obstacles during emergency
braking. However, the consequences
of turning sharply at high speed
cannot be overcome by the ABS.
•Do not attempt to pump the brakes to
avoid skidding as this can interfere
with the ABS operation. The ABS will
not allow the wheels to skid under
normal road conditions.
•The ABS will tend to keep the vehicle
straight during braking. Because
braking distances may increase under
certain road conditions, it is
necessary to plan and make turning
manoeuvres as early as possible.

Brakes
164
L
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
(EPB)
The switch which operates the parkbrake
is mounted on the centre console to the
rear of the gear selector.
To engage the parkbrake 1: Pull the
parkbrake switch upwards and release.
The switch will return to the neutral
position. The parkbrake warning/brake
fluid low warning light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
The Drive Away Release feature allows
the parkbrake to release automatically as
the vehicle is driven away.
To disengage the parkbrake 2: With the
ignition system in the ON position or with
the engine running, apply the foot brake
and press the parkbrake switch down.
If the parkbrake is applied while the
vehicle is stationary and D or R is
selected, applying the throttle will
automatically release the parkbrake.
The parkbrake is also automatically
released when the gear selector is moved
from the P position.
Inadvertent operation of the parkbrake
whilst the vehicle is in motion, abov
3 km/h (1.8 mph), will cause the message
PARK BRAKE APPLIED to be displayed
on the message centre, the warning light
in the instrument cluster will be
illuminated and a warning chime will
sound.
If the parkbrake is applied whilst the
vehicle is moving, releasing the switch will
disengage the parkbrake. The parkbrake
cannot be applied whilst the vehicle is
moving and the throttle pressed.
Note: If the vehicle is in motion, the
parkbrake should only be used as an
emergency brake.
Caution: Take care that the vehicle is
safely parked to prevent it from rolling
if you wish to leave the parkbrake off.
However, it is advisable to always use
the parkbrake.
The warning light in the instrument cluster
will remain on for a short time if the
parkbrake is applied when the ignition
system is reverted to the convenience
mode, see page 42.
If a fault in the system is detected, a
message PARK BRAKE FAULT or
CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE will be
displayed. Seek qualified assistance as
soon as possible.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected a message APPLYFOOT
AND PARKBRAKE will be displayed
when the ignition is next switched on.
Depress the footbrake and pull the
parkbrake switch up to apply the
parkbrake. This is required to reset the
parkbrake system. The parkbrake will
now function correctly.
JAG0045L
1 2

165
Stability Control
R
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
!WARNING:
The fact that the vehicle is fitted with
DSC must never allow the driver to be
tempted into taking risks which could
affect his/her safety or that of other
road users. In all cases it remains the
driver’s responsibility to drive safely
according to the prevailing conditions.
Dynamic stability control is operational
whenever the engine is running, unless it
has been switched off. When the system
is operating, the warning light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
The DSC system controls the anti-lock
braking system (ABS), traction control
and yaw control of the vehicle.
The DSC system assists the driver in
retaining directional control of the vehicle
in situations where the vehicle is sliding
(understeer or oversteer). It must not
encourage the driver to drive beyond the
limit of adhesion or at speeds higher than
those suitable for the prevailing road and
traffic conditions.
It applies braking pressure to individual
wheels if excessive variation is detected.
This ensures that the vehicle follows the
driver’s intended direction of travel.
Traction control will intervene to prevent
wheel spin by automatically reducing the
power output from the engine and
applying braking to individual wheels.
This improves acceleration, particularly
on surfaces with uneven friction, for
example, one wheel on ice the other on
tarmac.
Trac dynamic stability control (Trac
DSC)
Trac DSC is an additional feature where
DSC settings are optimised for maximum
traction in difficult conditions, such as
deep snow, sand or gravel. This makes
greater traction possible, without having
to completely lose the benefits of DSC,
however, vehicle stability may be
reduced.
Caution: Vehicle safety could be
reduced by inappropriate use of Trac
DSC. Trac DSC should only be used
when necessary for the prevailing
conditions:
•In deep snow.
•To maintain the movement of the
vehicle on soft or loose surfaces
e.g. gravel, sand.
•When snow chains are fitted.

Stability Control
166
L
USING STABILITY CONTROL
Switching between DSC and Trac DSC
- All vehicles
•Press and hold the DSC switch for
less than three seconds.
•The message centre will temporarily
display either Trac DSC or DSC ON.
•The warning light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate while Trac DSC
is selected.
•The warning light will flash when DSC
or Trac DSC is active.
Note: If cruise control is engaged it will
automatically disengage if stability control
activates.
Switching between DSC OFF and ON -
Normally aspirated engines only
Switching DSC OFF:
•Press and hold the DSC switch for
more than three seconds.
•The message centre will temporarily
display DSC OFF and a warning
chime will sound.
•The warning light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
Switching DSC ON:
If DSC is OFF:
•Press and release the DSC switch.
•The DSC system will switch on, the
message centre will temporarily
display DSC ON.
•The warning light on the instrument
cluster will be extinguished.
Stability control indicator - All vehicles
A system malfunction is indicated by the
message DSC NOT AVAILABLE in the
message centre and the amber priority
warning light. The instrument cluster
warning light will also be lit.
It is safe to drive the vehicle but the DSC
system will not activate under wheel spin
or slide conditions. You should seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.
Computer active technology system
(CATS)
If the message centre displays the
message CATS SYSTEM FAULT, a fault
has been detected in the adaptive
damping system. Seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.
JAG0262L

167
Parking Aid
R
Parking Aid
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
!WARNING:
•It remains the driver’s responsibility
to be vigilant when reversing. Small
children or animals may not be
detected by the system.
•It remains the driver’s responsibility
to detect obstacles and estimate
the car’s distance from them. Some
overhanging objects, barriers, thin
obstructions or painted surfaces
which could possibly cause
damage to the vehicle may not be
detected by the system. Always be
vigilant when reversing.
Caution:
•Once the system has been
activated by selecting reverse or
using the switch, the rear sensors
are active when the gear selector is
in neutral. Therefore, if an obstacle
is detected a tone will sound.
•Objects moving away from the
vehicle will be reported. However,
whilst driving away, object warning
may be temporarily reported due to
ground reflection.
The Park Assist System is automatically in
standby when the ignition is turned on.
USING THE PARKING AID
Touch-screen
To set the preferences of the parking
assist, the settings are accessed via the
touch-screen Home screen and Veh.
settings.
Select Parking (1).
There is a link to Vol. presets in order that
the volume of the parking assist warning
beeps may be adjusted.
Note: The volume adjusts both front and
rear speaker volume.
When the reverse parking aid is active, a
pop-up screen is initiated displaying the
area of the vehicle. This can be cancelled
by touching the screen within the pop-up
area.
mirror dip
Vol. presets
Off On
Vehicle
Security
Parking
Valet mode
Reverse
12 : 26 pm
JAG0264NAS
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
Valet
12 : 26 pm
Parking Aid Alert
JAG0265NAS

Parking Aid
168
L
Rear parking aid
When reverse gear is selected and the
ignition is on, if obstacles are detected
within operating range, as shown in the
illustration below, the rear parking assist
automatically provides an audible
proximately warning to the nearest
detected object.
1 is approximately 60 cm (24 inches).
2 is approximately 180 cm (71 inches).
The beep tone increases in rate as the
vehicle approaches the obstacle.
The rear parking assist beep will become
continuous when the obstacle is detected
at or within 30 cm (12 inches) from the
vehicle.
Note: The outer rear sensors 1 will show
visual detection on the message centre
before the audible warning is given.
Rear fitted accessories
Particular care must be taken when
reversing with rear fitted accessories e.g.
bicycle carrier, as the rear park assist will
only indicate the distance from the
bumper to the obstacle.
System Fault
The parking assist may sound spurious
tones if it detects a frequency tone using
the same band as the sensors.
Cleaning the Sensors
Do not clean the sensors with abrasive or
sharp objects or materials.
For reliable operation, the sensors in the
rear bumpers should be kept free from
ice, frost and grime.
When using a high pressure spray the
sensors should only be sprayed briefly
and not from a distance of less than
20 cm (8 inches).
JAG0267G
2
JAG0270G
1

169
Cruise Control
R
Cruise Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The cruise (speed) control system can be
used by the driver to maintain a selected
vehicle speed above 30 km/h (18mph)
without the driver having to use the
accelerator.
Adjustment controls on the steering
wheel allow the driver manual control of
the system. Brake and clutch operations
also influence the cruise control system.
SPEED ADJUSTMENT CONTROL 1
thumb wheel is used to engage cruise
control initially by rolling it upwards. It is
also used to increase or decrease the set
speed.
CANCEL 2 cancels cruise control but
retains the set speed in memory.
RESUME 3 engages cruise control after it
has been cancelled.
USING THE CRUISE CONTROL
Setting vehicle speed
!WARNING:
Only use cruise control when
conditions are favourable, for example,
straight, dry, open roads with light
traffic.
When you are travelling at the speed you
require, which must be above 30 km/h
(18 mph), roll the speed adjustment
control 1 upwards or downwards to
increase or decrease speed.
Cruise control will engage and maintain
the set speed and you can remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal.
Note: Cruise control will automatically
disengage when the brake pedal is
pressed or when the vehicle speed falls
below 30 km/h (18 mph).
Changing the speed
There are two ways to change the set
speed:
•Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed then roll the speed
adjustment control upwards (+).
•Increase or decrease the speed by
rolling the speed adjustment control
upwards (+) or downwards (-) until the
desired speed is obtained.
JAG0035G
1
23
JAG0272G

Cruise Control
170
L
Note: The set speed can be increase or
decrease the speed in steps of 1 mph
(2 km/h) by rolling the speed adjustment
control upwards (+) or downwards (-)
briefly until the desired speed is obtained.
Resuming the speed
If the vehicle is accelerated above the set
speed, then the set speed will be resumed
when the accelerator pedal is released.
If CANCEL is pressed, or the brake pedal
is pressed, the cruise control will
disengage but the set speed memory will
be retained. Press RESUME and the
vehicle will return to the set speed.
Note: Cruise control will not resume at
speeds below 30 km/h (18 mph).
RESUME will not operate if the ignition
has been turned OFF.
Caution:
•RESUME should only be used if the
driver is aware of the set speed and
intends to return to it.
•It is not recommended to resume
set speed when a low gear is
selected as excessive engine
speeds will occur.
Cruise control will switch OFF and clear
the memory when:
•The ignition system is switched OFF.
•A fault occurs. The cruise control
system will switch OFF and cannot be
used until the fault is cleared.
Automatic switch off
Cruise control will switch off but the set
speed will remain in the memory when:
•The CANCEL button is pressed.
•The brake pedal is pressed.
•Speed falls below 30 km/h (18 mph).
•Neutral, Park or Reverse gear
positions are selected.
•Dynamic stability control is operating.
•The difference between the actual and
set speed is too great.
•When the vehicle reaches a maximum
speed of 192 km/h (120 mph).
•The accelerator pedal is used to
accelerate beyond the set speed for
too long a period.

171
Cruise Control
R
Message centre information displays
Message Warning
Light
Priority
Indicator
Meaning
CRUISE
ENGAGED
None None Displayed when cruise control
system is operating.
CRUISE
OVERRIDE
None None Driver is pressing the accelerator
pedal overriding cruise control
function. Message will disappear
when accelerator pedal is
released and cruise control
speed is resumed.
CRUISE
CANCELLED
None None Driver has cancelled cruise
control or is braking.
CRUISE NOT
AVAILABLE
None None Cruise control or adaptive cruise
control malfunction.

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)
180
L
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
!WARNING:
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) set
speeds must be within local speed
restriction limits. The driver must
always ensure that a safe speed is set,
taking into account the prevailing
traffic and road conditions.
ASL can be used in a situation where
varying vehicle speed is likely but a
maximum speed must not be exceeded.
For example, where a local speed limit is
80km/h (50mph), the set speed could be
at that limit or just under. The driver is
then safe in the knowledge that the local
speed limit cannot be exceeded while
ASL is operating.
If ASL is not selected, cruise control is
always available by simply rotating the
thumb wheel on the right hand side of the
steering wheel to set a cruising speed.
The ASL button allows the driver to select
between cruise control and the automatic
speed limiter. The ASL can be set to any
speed between 30km/h (18mph) and
240 km/h (150 mph).
When ASL is selected, the instrument
panel telltale status light will illuminate.
When the ASL button is pressed again,
the light will extinguish, ASL will be
cancelled and cruise control will be
available again.
USING THE ASL
Setting a speed limit
1. Press the ASL button.
2. Use the thumb wheel 1 to set the
required speed.
While a speed is being set or altered
the message centre display in the
instrument panel will show the
selected speed.
3. The set speed can be adjusted at any
time by rotating the thumb wheel 1.
Note: The message is also displayed at
other times as an information display.
JAG0500N
LIMITER SET
XXX MPH
J
AG0479G
32
1

181
Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)
R
When ASL is selected and a set speed
inserted, the engine will respond normally
up to the set speed. Further accelerator
pedal pressure will not increase the
vehicle speed beyond your set speed
Suspending ASL
ASL can be suspended by pressing the
CANCEL button 3. Applying sudden,
rapid acceleration (kickdown) will also
suspend ASL.
Resuming ASL
If ASL has been suspended, it can be
reinstated with a single press of the
RESUME button 2, however, ASL will
only reinstate if the vehicle speed is less
than the current speed set in memory and
greater than 30km/h (18mph). The
message centre will display an
appropriate message if the vehicle speed
is too fast to resume ASL.
Exceeding the set speed
If the set speed is exceeded, e.g. on a
steep downhill section, the message
centre will display an appropriate
message along with an amber warning
light.
There are three categories of over limit
displays:
1. If the set speed is exceeded by up to
15km/h (9mph), the message centre
will display the message along with an
amber warning light
2. If the set speed is exceeded by more
than 15km/h (9mph), the message
centre will display the message along
with a flashing amber warning light.
3. If the set speed is exceeded by more
than 15km/h (9mph) for a duration of
five seconds, the message centre will
display the message along with a
flashing amber warning light and also
give an audible warning tone.
Use your brakes to rectify the situation.
ASL unavailable
If ASL is not available due to a fault, the
message centre will display an
appropriate message along with an
amber warning light.
The message and warning light will
display continuously while ASL is
selected. See Information Displays, page
118.
When the ignition is switched off, ASL is
deactivated and any set speed is deleted
from memory.
LIMITER
CANCELLED
TOO FAST TO
RESUME
OVER LIMIT
XXX MPH
LIMITER NOT
AVAILABLE

Audio
182
L
Audio
RADIO RECEPTION
Your radio receives signals whilst on the
move, and may experience widely
differing reception characteristics.
Because of this, some interference is to
be expected from time to time during a
journey.
FM transmitters can only broadcast over
a limited range, and good clear signals
will only be received in the immediate area
of the transmitter. When travelling,
occasionally it may be necessary to
re-tune the radio to offset the effects of
moving from one transmitter area to
another.
While automatic re-tuning helps to reduce
the effects of signal changes, some
manual re-tuning may still be required
(especially for local stations) in areas of
weak reception.
The broadcast range for good stereo
reception is within approximately
48 - 64 km (30 - 40 miles) of the
transmitter.
FM Signals travel in a straight line, so
large obstacles, such as tall buildings,
can shield the car from the signal causing
distortion or loss of reception (known as
dead spots).
Distortion can also occur if FM signals
received directly from the transmitter, mix
with signals deflected by obstructions
such as mountains, hills, and tall
buildings. This is known as multi-path
distortion.
Note: Although distortion, interference
and lack of signal clarity are sometimes
attributed to a fault in the radio, this is
rarely the case.
JAG0282G

183
Audio
R
GENERAL INFORMATION
The sound system is available in two
versions:
The Jaguar Sound System comprises a
radio and in-dash 6 compact disc (CD)
player and door mounted speakers and
additional speakers in rear quarters.
The Jaguar Premium Surround Sound
System comprises a radio and in-dash 6
compact disc (CD) player, with upgraded
speakers mounted in the doors and rear
quarters, plus an additional speaker
mounted in the fascia and a sub-woofer
mounted in the passenger foot well under
the carpet.
This speaker configuration allows the
reproduction of audio in stereo, 3-channel
or Dolby Pro Logic II Surround Sound.
The audio system can be controlled from
the switches on the touch-screen
console, the touch-screen buttons and
from the multi-function controls on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
These controls are described in the
Steering Wheel section on page 64.
Audio system care
Caution:
•Care must be taken to avoid spilling
or splashing drinks onto the audio
unit. In the event of such an
occurrence advise your Jaguar
Dealer/Authorised Repairer.
•The audio unit may be damaged if
unsuitable items like credit cards or
coins are pushed inside the CD
aperture.
Compact discs (CDs)
When handling CDs, do not touch the
playing surface. CDs should be stored in
their cases away from direct sunlight,
heat and dust. Scratches, finger marks or
dust on the surface of a disc can cause
the optical pick-up to skip tracks. If the
surface of a CD is dirty, use an
appropriate CD cleaner.
Do not attempt to play discs that are
damaged, warped, cracked or of
incorrect size. They can seriously damage
the unit’s play-back mechanism.
Aerial operation
Caution: When using an automatic car
wash ensure that the audio system is
turned OFF so that the aerial is
retracted. Ensure that enough time is
given for the aerial to fully retract.
The aerial automatically rises when the
audio system is switched ON. The aerial
will lower when the audio system is
switched OFF.
Note: The aerial will always be raised
regardless of being in AM/FM or CD mode
to enable RDS information (where
available) to be received.
It is important to clean the aerial
periodically to maintain smooth operation
and good reception, see page 228.
Caution: Do not attempt to raise the
aerial manually.

Audio
184
L
AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW
The Audio Unit is located in the
touch-screen console, and is controlled
by touch-screen buttons 1 and hard
buttons 2- 9).
1. Touch-screen: See page 121.
2. Load: Press to load CD, see page
195.
3. Eject: Press to eject CD, see page
195.
4. Seek up: Press arrow to seek radio
frequency range up or to change CD
track up.
5. Seek down: Press arrow to seek
radio frequency range down or to
change CD track down.
6. Source: Press to change radio band
or to change the source media
between radio or CD.
7. Audio system ON/OFF and volume:
Press the control knob to switch the
system ON/OFF.
Volume control: Turn the control
knob to increase or decrease volume.
Any volume setting made whilst in
audio, phone, navigation or voice
activation mode, will be memorised
for that system.
8. CD load and eject slot.
CD
WABC WFAN
WXRK WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
WCBS
Settings
Audio
12 : 26 pm
Autostore
AM
/
FM
PTY 3CH
AM 770 WABC
Text sent by station
JAG0015NAS
8
7
64
3
2
5
1

185
Audio
R
USING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
The Audio system touch-screen structure
flow charts are referenced at page 127.
To operate the audio system the ignition
system must be ON (engine Start/Stop
button pressed). When the engine is
stopped, for the audio system to remain
active, the START/STOP button must be
pressed again without pressing the brake
pedal.
The audio system can be turned ON in
two ways:
Pressing the audio ON/OFF control knob
on the touch-screen console, or
Pressing the Audio touch-screen button
on the main Home touch-screen.
The touch-screen displays the current
audio settings.
Radio broadcast system display panel
(in AM/FM mode)
JAG0284G
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Valet
AUDIO OFF
12 : 26 pm
JAG0283NAS PTY Priority Programme Type
selected.
DPL II,
3CH
Surround mode - Dolby Pro
Logic II or 3CH.
FM2 Frequency channel
selected.
89.1 Frequency of selected
station.
WCBS Radio station selected.
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Valet
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
JAG0285NAS
AM
/
FM
CD
Settings
Audio
PTY 3CH
AM 770 WABC
Text sent by station
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
Autostore
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
JAG0286NAS
PTY 3CH
AM 770 WABC

Audio
186
L
1. AM/FM band switching.
2. Radio text sent by radio station.
3. Settings.
4. Autostore.
5. Seek up and Seek down.
6. Preset memorised radio stations.
RADIO SYSTEM OPERATION
AM/FM band switching
Pressing AM/FM will cycle the radio
through FM1, FM2 and AM. Band
selection will be shown in the display
panel. When a CD is being played,
pressing the band switch will select radio
operation.
Radio text sent by station
Radio text messages sent out by the
selected station.
To set the display to show radio text
messages see Settings - Options -FM
text.
A pop-up display screen is available,
showing the whole of the message, by
pressing the continuation arrow.
The pop-up will time out after
approximately 12 seconds, or can be
cancelled by touching anywhere within
the pop-up. Pressing the FM text off
button will cancel the display for Radio
text entirely.
6
AM
/
FM
CD
Settings
Audio
PTY 3CH
AM 770 WABC
Text sent by station
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
Autostore
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
12 3
4
5
JAG0286NAS
CD
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
WCBS
Settings
Audio
PTY 3CH
AM 770 WABC
Text sent by station
Autostore
AM
/
FM
12 : 26 pm
JAG0019NAS
FM2 AMFM1
AM
/
FM
CD
Settings
Audio
PTY 3CH
FM 102.6 WPLJ
Text sent by station
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
Autostore
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
JAG0288NAS
Text sent by station
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
Valet
FM text
FM text off
The latest news headlines from WPLG.
12 : 26 pm
JAG0289NAS

187
Audio
R
Settings
When selected, displays the available
audio system setting facilities.
Sound: Bass, Treble levels are increased
or decreased by pressing the (+) or (-)
buttons.
Balance, left to right, and Fade, rear to
front, levels are optimised for a selected
seating position by pressing the L or R, R
or F buttons.
Options
Priority PTY interrupt skip: Interruptions
for, NEWS or other selected priority PTY,
can be skipped by pressing the skip
button 1. This will cancel the pop-up and
the announcement. The radio will return
to the previously selected audio source.
Pressing anywhere within the pop-up 2
will cancel the pop-up but the
announcement will continue.
Note:
•
Interrupt skip will not cancel activation
of a priority PTY and it will remain
ready for the next interrupt.
•
PTY and priority PTY features are
reliant upon the broadcast information
from radio stations, and may be much
better in some areas than others.
FM text is selected either ON or OFF.
PTY (Programme type, where broadcast)
This has two functions:
•to set a desired priority programme
type
•to search for a programme type (PTY
Search) and re-tune to it.
AM
/
FM
CD
Settings
Audio
PTY 3CH
AM 770 WABC
Text sent by station
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
Autostore
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
JAG0286NAS
Audio
Sound
Options
PTY
Treble
Bass
Balance
Fade
L
R
R
F
Settings
12 : 26 pm
JAG0291NAS
Audio
Sound
Sound
Options
PTY
Settings
On
FM text Off
14 : 26 pm
JAG0292NAS

Audio
188
L
Use the scroll buttons to cycle through
the available programme types (there are
30 types available), press the required
menu buttons to select the desired
programme types.
Priority programme type
Select the required priority programme,
then select the previous screen button.
The radio will now wait for RBDS
information to indicate that a station has
changed its programme type, e.g. to
NEWS. The radio will now re-tune to the
new station for the duration that it remains
on that programme type.
If the current station is already on the
selected priority programme type, then
when this station is lost, the radio will
attempt to find another with the correct
programme type.
Note: PTY interrupt feature is also active
in the CD mode.
PTY search
Once a desired programme type is
selected press the PTY search button. If
there is a station with the correct PTY,
then the radio will re-tune to it. If not, the
radio will indicate NO PTY and return to
the current station.
While PTY is displayed, a search of the
set PTY programmes can be carried out
by pressing the seek down or seek up
buttons.
Clear all will cancel ALL the selected
priority settings, except for PTY-Alarm,
and the PTY indicator will clear from the
display,
PTY-Alarm (where broadcast)
When using the radio with RBDS
selected, a PTY-Alert service may be
activated from the menu, to alert on any
crises of major national importance.
When such a broadcast is made, ALERT
will appear in the audio display. The
default setting is ON.
Audio
Sound
Options
PTY
Settings
Sound
Options
PTY
Rock
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Clear all
PTY
Search
12 : 26 pm
JAG0295NAS
Audio
Sound
Options
PTY
Settings
Sound
Options
PTY
Alert
Personality
Public
College
Weather
Clear all
PTY
Search
12 : 26 pm
JAG0296NAS

189
Audio
R
Seek tuning
The seek down or seek up buttons on
the touch-screen console and the
touch-screen carry out the same function.
Short press: In AM or FM mode, pressing
and releasing the seek down (left-hand)
or seek up (right-hand) buttons 1 will
activate the radio tuning through the
frequency range, up or down, to the next
available station.
The touch-screen will display Seek on the
upper display until a station has been
found, and will then display the station
name, where available.
Long press: In AM or FM mode, for as
long as the button is being pressed the
frequencies will be scanned either up or
down.
The touch-screen will display manual on
the upper display for a short time. While
this is displayed, a short press of the
buttons will also allow the frequencies to
be scanned.
Autostore
Autostore: The automatic memory
function programmes up to nine strong
stations on a selected waveband to
presets 1 to 9.
To activate this function, press and hold
Autostore button for at least two
seconds.
The radio will be briefly muted while it
searches the selected waveband (AM,
FM) for up to nine strong stations.
When programming is completed the
radio will default to preset number 1, and
audio volume will be restored.
If stations cannot be located for all the
preset positions, those that are found will
be allocated positions commencing with
number 1, leaving the remainder not
programmed. The display will show ----
and be greyed out if unprogrammed
preset are selected.
CD
Settings
Audio
AM
/
FM
Autostore
PTY 3CH
FM 97.5 Seek
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
JAG0297NAS
Seek
CD
Settings
Audio Manual
AM
/
FM
Autostore
PTY 3CH
FM 97.5
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
JAG0298NAS
Manual
CD
Settings
Audio
AM
/
FM
Autostore
PTY 3CH
FM 97.5
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
JAG0299NAS

Audio
190
L
When programmes have been set: A
short press of Autostore will allow the
user to switch between the automatically
stored stations and the manually stored
stations.
Preset memorised radio stations (1 - 9)
!WARNING:
In the interests of road safety, do not
attempt to preset a station while
driving.
On each waveband (AM, FM1, FM2), nine
stations can be memorised using the
touch-screen keypad buttons. After
tuning to a station, press and hold the
selected button until the station has been
stored. A station can be recalled from the
preset memory by pressing and
immediately releasing the button.
A long press of the steering wheel preset
selector button will cycle through the
preset stations.
Automatic volume control (AVC)
This maintains radio volume at a level
sufficient to overcome road noise as
vehicle speed increases or decreases.
To activate the AVC:
•From the main Home touch-screen
menu, select Vehicle.
•Select Syst. settings.
•Select Vol. presets.
•Select either Low, Medium or High for
the AVC.
Jaguar Premium Surround Sound
This audio system has the facility of
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) which
optimises the sound for specific seating
positions.
It also allows the user to select stereo,
3-channel stereo or Dolby Pro Logic II
Surround Sound. It is recommended that
Dolby Pro Logic II Surround Sound is
used in CD mode and strong FM
transmissions.
Note:
•
When various setting are altered in
DSP, the sound will briefly fade while
the settings are changing and will
return to normal when the change has
been completed.
•
Convertible only: The sound will
automatically change for when the
convertible top is up or down.
CD
Settings
Audio
AM
/
FM
Autostore
KSAN
KSAN
PTY 3CH
FM 93.5
WABC WFAN
WXRP KSAN WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
JAG0300NAS
Vehicle
Display set
Preferences
Button audio
Navigation
Vol. presets
AVC Low Medium High
12 : 26 pm
JAG0301NAS

191
Audio
R
Settings
When selected, defaults to Sound and
displays the available premium audio
system setting facilities.
•Stereo, 1
•3 Ch, 2
•Dolby Pro Logic II Surround Sound,
3.
These levels are altered by selecting the
appropriate buttons.
Bass, Treble, Sub levels are increased or
decreased by pressing the (+) or (-)
buttons for the system facilities.
To select further settings, use the scroll
down button to access the next screen
display.
Select either Centre or Surround.
Note: The number of available settings
will depend on whether Stereo, 3Ch or
Dolby Pro Logic II Surround Sound is
selected.
AM
/
FM
CD
Settings
Audio
PTY 3CH
AM 770 WABC
Text sent by station
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
Autostore
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
JAG0286NAS
Audio Settings
Sound
Bal/Fade
Options
Base
Treble
Sub
Stereo 3 Ch.
DSP
PLII
PTY
12 : 26 pm
JAG0303NAS
Audio Settings
Sound
Bal/Fade
Options
Base
Treble
Sub
Stereo 3 Ch.
DSP
PLII
PTY
12 : 26 pm
JAG0306NAS
3
12
Audio Settings
Sound
Sound
Bal/Fade
Options
Base
Treble
Sub
Stereo 3 Ch.
DSP
PLII
PTY
12 : 26 pm
JAG0307NAS
Audio Settings
Sound
Sound
Bal/Fade
Options
Center
Surround
PTY
12 : 26 pm
JAG0308NAS

Audio
192
L
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): To
optimise the sound for specific seating
positions select DSP and then select the
required seating position.
Either Front, Driver or All may be
selected.
Bal/Fade: The sound can be optimised
by using the scrolling buttons to alter the
Balance (left to right) and Fade (front to
rear).
Options and PTY functions are the same
as for the Jaguar Sound System, refer to
Settings on page 187.
RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM (RBDS)
Your radio is equipped with RBDS, which
enables the audio unit to receive
additional information with normal radio
signals.
When tuned to certain stations on the FM
waveband the radio decodes signals
transmitted to provide the following
functions (dependent upon the service
available from the broadcasters).
Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast
RBDS. If a non-RBDS station is received,
RBDS features will not be available.
•RBDS station name display:
When RBDS is selected the station
name is displayed.
•RDS Priority programme type auto
re-tuning (where broadcast):
Can be selected to interrupt and
switch to the selected programme
type e.g. News, for its duration or can
be used to search for specific PTY
stations.
If the RBDS function does not respond
correctly, see the trouble-shooting guide
on the next page.
Audio Settings
Sound
Bal/Fade
Options
Base
Treble
Sub
Stereo 3 Ch.
DSP
DSP
PLII
PTY
12 : 26 pm
JAG0304NAS
Audio Settings
DSP
Front
Driver
All
12 : 26 pm
JAG0305NAS
Audio Settings
Sound
Bal/Fade
Options
PTY
12 : 26 pm
JAG0309NAS

193
Audio
R
RBDS trouble-shooting guide
Incorrect response from RBDS Reason and rectification
Radio does not display programme
name.
RBDS name is not available from the broadcast.
Station name is lost and displays
frequency only.
Radio has lost reception of the RBDS data due
to vehicle moving out of transmitter range, loss
of signal in a tunnel, under a garage forecourt
canopy, or similar screening. If the latter is the
case, when the vehicle is clear of the screening,
the station name will return after a short delay.

Audio
194
L
COMPACT DISC (CD) SYSTEM
OPERATION
Caution:
•Copyright laws vary in different
countries; check the laws in your
country if you want to record from
copyright source material.
•Due to technical incompatibility,
recordable (CD-R) discs and
re-writable (CD-RW) discs may not
function correctly.
•These CD units will play compact
discs that conform to the
international Red Book standard
audio specification. Copy protected
CDs from some manufacturers do
not conform to this standard and
playback cannot be guaranteed.
•Dual format, dual sided discs (DVD
Plus, CD-DVD format), now being
adopted by the music industry, are
thicker than normal CDs and
consequently playback cannot be
guaranteed in Jaguar audio units,
and jamming could occur. Warranty
claims, where this type of disc is
found to be inside an audio unit
returned for repair, will not be
accepted.
•Irregular shaped CDs and CDs with
a scratch protection film or self
adhesive labels attached should
not be used.
Note: Some privately recorded CD-R
discs may not have been acceptably
formatted to be able to be played on this
CD player.
An in-dash 6 compact disc (CD) player is
installed in the touch-screen console, see
page 184, and it will accommodate up to
six discs. It will play Compact Disc Digital
Audio (CDDA) discs (normal discs), MP3
and WMA files.
The main Home screen display will
indicate which CD slot is loaded and
ready for playing. If no CDs have been
loaded, the touch-screen indicates the
unloaded state by displaying the six
ghosted discs.
To access the CD player touch-screen:
•From the main Home touch-screen
menu, select Audio.
•Select CD.
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
Valet
12 : 26 pm
5
Tr 3
CD
03:42
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
JAG0310NAS
AM
/
FM
CD
Settings
Audio
PTY 3CH
AM 770 WABC
Text sent by station
WABC WFAN
WXRP WNYC WPLJ
WQXR WHTZ WHUD
Autostore
WCBS
12 : 26 pm
JAG0311NAS

195
Audio
R
To load the CD player
Single CD - player empty:
Load a CD into the loading slot. A CD
loading message is displayed on the
touch-screen.
Single CD - player partially loaded:
From the CD player touch-screen, select
an empty slot 2, 1 indicates the current
playing CD, 3 indicates loaded slots. A
message indicates to insert the CD into
the empty slot. Load a CD into the slot.
More than one CD:
Press the LOAD button and insert each
CD into an CD slot as requested by the
displayed message. A pop-up message
on the screen will indicate which slot is
being selected until the unit is fully
loaded.
When the CD player has been loaded, CD
operation is via the CD touch-screen.
To unload the CD player
Press the eject button. A short press will
eject a single CD, a long press will eject
each loaded CD in turn.
JAG0312G
CD
Tr
Settings
Audio
/
CD
123456
00:00
12 : 26 pm
Mix Repeat
AM FM
1
JAG0313NAS 1 2 3
JAG0314G
JAG0315G

Audio
196
L
CD Touch-screen display and
operation
When a CD has been selected, the upper
display indicates which disc is being
loaded and will commence playing when
loading has been completed.
TR12 - Track number display of the track
being played.
03:47 - Track elapsed time play.
Seek down and seek up buttons:
•Short press: Seeks down to previous
track or up to next track.
•Long press: Press the seek down to
play rapidly back through one or more
tracks (review). Press the seek up to
play rapidly forward through one or
more tracks (cue). Normal playback
will resume when either button is
released.
II - Pause button; Will pause the playing
track until pressed again. To resume the
CD, press again.
Mix CD: Short press: The track order of
play from the current CD is randomly
selected by the CD player, (on MP3 CDs a
short press will mix the tracks from the
current folder).
Mix all: Long press: The CD order of play
is randomly selected, by the CD player,
from all the loaded CDs, (on MP3 CDs a
long press will mix the tracks from all the
folders of the current MP3 disc).
Note: If the volume is turned down to
zero, the CD is automatically paused. Play
is resumed when the volume is increased.
DPLII
or
3CH
Surround mode - Dolby Pro
Logic II selected or 3-channel.
CD
Tr
Settings
Audio
/
CD
123456
12 : 26 pm
Mix Repeat
AM FM
3CH
Loading CD 1
JAG0316NAS
Tr
3CH
Loading CD 1
CD
Tr
Settings
Audio
/
CD
123456
12 : 26 pm
Mix Repeat
AM FM
3CH
12 03 47
JAG0318NAS
03 47Tr 12
CD
Tr
Settings
Audio
/
CD
123456
12 : 26 pm
Mix Repeat
AM FM
3CH
12 03 47Mix CD
JAG0319NAS
Mix CD Mix all

197
Audio
R
Repeat:
•Short press: Rpt Tr: Will repeat the
playing of the track continuously until
repeat is cancelled by pressing again.
•Long press: Rpt CD: Will repeat the
playing of the whole CD continuously
until repeat is cancelled by pressing
again.
Settings
When selected, displays the available CD
system setting facilities similar to the
audio system, see pages 187 and 191.
Options: CD text can be selected in the
CD mode.
The CD text display is similar to the Radio
text, but displays text that has been
recorded onto the CD (not all CDs have
CD text).
COMPACT DISC -
RECORDABLE (CD-R)
Some pre-recorded and personally
recorded discs, can contain additional
information on the disc, e.g. CD titles,
track titles and the artists name (ID 3
Tags).
Additional buttons allow you to select
folders and tracks and display various
items of information about the recordings.
Typically, MP3 discs have the potential to
hold a great deal more music than a
conventional CD because each track can
be compressed to a higher degree during
recording.
If you record your own music, each
session must be properly closed, but the
whole disc does not have to be finalised.
Note:
•
A mixture of CDs and MP3 discs can
be loaded into the CD player together.
CD
Tr
Settings
Audio
/
CD
123456
12 : 26 pm
Mix Repeat
AM FM
3CH
12 03 47Mix CD
JAG0320NAS
Rpt Tr Rpt CD
CD
Tr
Settings
Audio
/
CD
123456
12 : 26 pm
Mix Repeat
AM FM
3CH
12 03 47Mix CD
JAG0321NAS
Audio
Sound
Sound
Options
PTY
Settings
On
CD text Off
14 : 26 pm
JAG0322NAS

Audio
198
L
•
The CD player is not guaranteed to
play every disc available because of
variations in the quality of discs.
Playing MP3 discs
If the MP3 disc has been recorded with
the music files contained within folders,
additional information is available by
selecting Folders.
The titles of any tracks and folders
recorded on the CD will be displayed in
alphabetical order as the disc may be
recorded in another order.
Select the folder to access the tracks
contained within the folder.
MP3 folder and track format
A CD-R or CD-RW can have MP3 folders
and tracks recorded in many different
ways, with many layers of folders and with
tracks distributed throughout the folder
structure.
To minimise the loading on the system, a
rigid folder structure is recommended.
Note:
•
Any CD containing a mixture of MP3
and CDDA tracks will be treated as a
CD (any MP3 tracks will be ignored).
•
The CD player may take a long time
(one minute or more) to load an MP3
disc owing to the number of tracks on
it.
CD
Tr
Settings
Audio
/
CD
123456
12 : 26 pm
Mix Repeat
AM FM
3CH
Folders
JAG0323NAS
CD
Tr
Audio
/
CD
12 : 26 pm
AM FM
3CH
00 00CD 3
Please Please Me
Beatles-Hits
Revolver
Sgt. Pepper's
Help
JAG0324NAS
CD
Tr
Audio
/
CD
12 : 26 pm
AM FM
3CH
00 00CD 3
Eleanor Rigby
Revolver
I'm Only Sleeping
Love You To
Taxman
2
JAG0325NAS

199
Satellite Radio
R
Satellite Radio
SATELLITE DIGITAL AUDIO
RADIO SERVICE (SDARS)
Signals from a satellite broadcast radio
service are encoded and a subscription to
the broadcast operator (SIRIUS) is
required to receive them.
The following features are inhibited when
driving:
•Parental lock.
•Channel skip.
•Edit favourites - song seek list.
As a digital signal is used, satellite radio is
able to provide output of radio broadcasts
with the sound quality and clarity of CD
playback.
RECEIVING SATELLITE RADIO
BROADCASTS
To access satellite radio from the vehicle
Home screen:
•Select Audio on the touch-screen.
•Select Sat Radio.
If you are not currently subscribed to
SIRIUS, No Subscription will be
displayed below Sat Radio followed by a
subscription screen, see page 209.
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
Welcome to Jaguar Touch Drive
External
Left Right
Sat Radio
Ch021 Octane
Rock
TM
12 : 34 pm
JOL4458
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Valet
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane I-90 1053
Bridge Pulse Nation
Guns & Roses
Sat Options
SR1 CH022 Octane
Rock Hits Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4673

Satellite Radio
200
L
Satellite radio display panel
1. Category of music which is currently
selected.
2. Channel which is currently selected.
3. Seek up and seek down buttons.
4. Back - to previous screen or setting.
5. Programme description text (PDT)
description, which provides details
(where available) of the artist’s name,
song title and the composer and
subscription information.
6. PDT text display area - artist currently
playing.
7. Six preset memorised radio channels.
Press to select the required channel
e.g. Octane preset is selected in the
above example.
Preset memorised radio channels
Three screens are available, listed as
SR1, SR2 and SR3, each displayed on the
top line of the screen. Each screen can
display up to six preset channels, giving a
total of 18 possible preset channels.
Selecting Sat Radio repeatedly, cycles
through the three screens.
Preset memorised channel - setting
To save a channel as a preset, tune into
the channel that is to be stored, then
press and hold the desired preset button
for approximately two seconds. Audio
output is muted while the channel is being
stored and returns once the operation is
complete.
To change a preset, select the desired
channel either via Category lists, see
page 204 or manually, Direct channel
entry, see page 205. Then press and hold
the desired preset until the new channel is
stored.
Note: If manual tuning is used and a
channel is selected that is an existing
preset, the preset will highlight. If the
same channel is stored in more than one
preset (on different screens for example)
and manual tuning is performed, the first
preset will highlight.
If required, repeat the procedure to store
up to 17 other satellite channels.
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane I-90 1053
Bridge Pulse Nation
Guns & Roses
Sat Options
SR1 CH022 Octane
Rock Hits Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4512
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane Wax CNBC
Strobe The Pulse Disney
Guns & Roses
Sat Options
SR2 Ch101 Vista
Dance Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4461
SR2 SR3SR1

201
Satellite Radio
R
Recalling a preset channel
Select the appropriate source where the
desired channel is located (SR1, SR2 or
SR3) by pressing Sat Radio to cycle
through the list.
Select the desired preset button, e.g.
Octane. Audio output will switch to the
satellite channel stored on the selected
preset.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Short press: Either the seek down button
(1) or seek up button (2) to step to the next
numerical channel.
The channel which is displayed on release
of either button will be the channel that
satellite radio will tune to.
SONG SEEK
Song Seek can store up to 10 song titles
along with the artist’s name etc., if it is
transmitted with the PDT (Programme
Descriptive Text) information.
If, while listening to any satellite channel,
one of the stored Song Seek Favourites is
playing on any other satellite channel, the
user will be alerted visually. The user can
choose to tune to that channel.
The display indicates that the user is
currently listening to Ch042 (Channel 42
Hot Jamz on SR1).
The Song Seek pop-up (Song Seek
Interrupt) is giving the user the choice to
listen instead, to a Favourites (Guns &
Roses) which is currently playing on
Channel 021.
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane I-90 1053
Bridge Pulse Nation
Guns & Roses
Sat Options
SR1 CH022 Octane
Rock Hits Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4460
OctaneSR1
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane I-90 1053
Bridge Pulse Nation
Guns & Roses
Sat Options
SR1 CH022 Octane
Rock Hits Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4513
12
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD
Guns & Roses
SR1 Ch042 Hot Jamz
R&B/ Urban Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4493
Guns & Roses
The Rock.....
Switch to Channel 021?
SongSeek Interrupt
No
Yes

Satellite Radio
202
L
Activating song seek
To activate Song Seek, select Settings
and then select Song Seek.
When the feature is active, pressing the
PDT button on the Settings display
screen, will present the user with the
Satellite Information display pop-up
where the current favourite songs can be
viewed and edited.
When the feature is not active, the user
cannot add to or edit the favourite songs
list. However, the PDT information can
still be seen by selecting the PDT button.
Editing song seek favourites list
Note: Editing of the favourites list cannot
be carried out while the vehicle is in
motion.
To edit the list of songs in Song Seek,
select Edit Favourites on the SAT
Information pop-up.
If Song Seek is not active, then both Add
to Favourites and Edit Favourites will be
inoperative.
If Edit Favourites is selected, then the
following screen will be displayed.
Delete All is highlighted and if selected,
all songs in the Song Seek favourites list
will be deleted.
Should only one song at a time be
required to be deleted, select the
particular song on the list.
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane I-90 1053
Bridge Pulse Nation
Guns & Roses
Sat Options
SR1 CH022 Octane
Rock Hits Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4514
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD
Guns & Roses
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Rock Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4490
Guns & Roses
The Rock
SAT Information
Add to Favorites
Edit Favorites
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
Pink Floyd Breathe
Beatles Revolver
Guns & Roses Paradise City
Beatles Eleanor Rigby
The Who My Generation
Delete All
12 : 34 pm
Delete
JOL4496

203
Satellite Radio
R
Select Delete to delete that song only.
Repeat the procedure for each song to be
deleted.
In all cases the user will be asked to
confirm that the song or songs should be
deleted.
Adding a song to the favourites list
To add a song to the Song Seek
favourites list, the following is necessary:
•The song should be currently playing.
•The user must select the PDT button;
a right-hand facing arrow situated at
the lower right hand side of the
screens.
The following screen will provide the
details of the song and give the user the
choice to add it to the favourites list.
If the user adds the song to the favourites
list, confirmation is as follows:
Favourites list is full
If the favourites list is full, the SAT
Information pop-up will indicate Entry
List is full. Delete Entry?
One or more songs must be deleted
before another song can be entered.
All songs may be deleted if desired.
To be able to put the Guns & Roses
example into the song seek favourites list,
first Edit Favourites in order to make
space.
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
Delete All
12 : 34 pm
Delete
JOL4495
Pink Floyd Breathe
Beatles Revolver
Guns & Roses Paradise City
Beatles Eleanor Rigby
The Who My Generation
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD
Guns & Roses
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Rock Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4492
Guns & Roses
The Rock
SAT Information
Add to Favorites
Edit Favorites
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD
Guns & Roses
SR1 Ch040 Wax
Pop Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4491
Entry Added
SAT Information
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD
Guns & Roses
SR1 Ch101 Vista
Pop Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4494
Guns & Roses
The Rock
SAT Information
Add to Favorites
Edit Favorites
Entry List is full. Delete Entry
i

Satellite Radio
204
L
SAT OPTIONS MENU
The Sat Options button on the satellite
radio screen provides four other menu
features plus a SAT information screen.
Select Sat Options to view the available
options.
The options are:
•Category Lists.
•Direct Channel.
•Parental Lock.
•Channel Skip.
•SAT Information.
Category lists
The above screen shows that Category
Lists has already been selected and that
the Pop category has also been selected.
The following screen shows some of the
various channels that play music within
the Pop category.
Once a channel within the Pop Category
(or any other category) has been selected,
the radio will re-tune to that channel and
the display will return to the Sat Radio
Home screen, but with the new channel
information displayed.
The new channel is Ch040 Wax, whereas
the previous channel was Ch021 Octane.
Browse PDT
The Browse feature allows the user to
scan all available PDT (Programme
Descriptive Text) within a given category
without changing the current satellite
channel.
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane Wax CNBC
Strobe The Pulse ---
Culture Club
Sat Options
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Rock Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4466
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
Category Lists
Direct Channel
Parental Lock
Channel Skip
SAT Information
Settings
All Channels
Pop
Rock
R&B / Urban
Dance
12 : 34 pm
JOL4467
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane Wax CNBC
Strobe The Pulse ---
Bill Withers - Lovely Day
Sat Options
SR1 Ch040 Wax
Pop Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4469
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
040 Wax
041 Sirius Hits
042 Slow Jamz
043 The Express
044 The Vault
Browse PDT
12 : 34 pm
JOL4468

205
Satellite Radio
R
The Browse feature will update the PDT
information as programme information
changes within the SIRIUS broadcast.
This view can be maintained while
listening to the audio on the current
satellite channel. The user can scroll
across all available channels using the up
and down arrows to view broadcasted
PDT information. At any time a new
channel can be selected and the screen
will return to the normal satellite view.
Direct channel entry
This option allows the user to input the
channel number directly.
Select Sat Options on the satellite radio
Home screen.
Select Direct Channel on the Sat
Options screen, and a numerical keypad
will be displayed. The user is asked to
enter a channel number.
Channel number 105 has been entered.
A short press on the C (Clear) button will
delete one digit at a time.
Select OK when the desired channel
number has been entered correctly.
If an invalid channel number has been
entered, this will be displayed on the
screen.
If a valid channel has been entered, then
the following screen (Sat Radio Home
screen) will be displayed, but with the new
channel information.
Parental lock
This option allows the user to lock any
given channel or channels to prevent
them from being accessed.
The locked channels will be skipped when
navigating through the channels using the
seek up or seek down buttons.
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
001
004
005
002
003
12 : 34 pm
JOL4470
Pink Floyd Breathe
Beatles Revolver
Guns & Roses Paradise City
Beatles Eleanor Rigby
The Who My Generation
Audio SR1 Ch021 Octane
Enter Channel Number
Category Lists C
OK
Direct Channel
Parental Lock
Channel Skip
Sat Information
12 : 26 pm
23
6
4
78 9
JOL4473
1
0
5
Audio SR1 Ch021 Octane
105
Category Lists C
OK
Direct Channel
Parental Lock
Channel Skip
Sat Information
12 : 26 pm
12 3
6
5
4
78 9
0
JOL4474
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane Wax CNBC
Strobe The Pulse ---
Todays Stock Report
Sat Options
SR1 Ch105 Bloomberg
News Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4475

Satellite Radio
206
L
To set-up, select Sat Options on the
satellite radio screen.
Note: Parental Lock cannot be performed
while the vehicle is in motion.
Select Parental Lock on the Sat Options
screen, and a numerical keypad will be
displayed. Enter a PIN number.
Number entry is identical to that for Direct
Channel Selection, except that there must
be four digits e.g. 125 must be entered as
0125 etc.
If the correct PIN is entered the following
screen is displayed which shows the
different Categories and All Channels.
Pop category has been selected.
After selecting Pop, the following screen
will be displayed:
Two channels are shown with the Lock
symbol.
There are three keys that the user can use
to lock or unlock channels.
The user can lock or unlock an individual
channel or lock them all within a
Category. To lock an individual channel,
just select the desired channel and select
Lock or Lock All depending on what is
displayed. The unlock procedure is the
same.
Edit Personal Identification Number
(PIN)
To edit the parental lock PIN, the user
must first enter the existing PIN.
If the system confirms that the entered
PIN is the correct one it will respond with
PIN Verified - Enter New PIN.
Enter the desired PIN (four digits).
This new PIN will then be stored and
over-write the previous one. A SAT
Information pop-up will indicate New PIN
Accepted.
Viewing a locked channel
When a locked channel is selected by
Channel Navigation, Direct Channel Entry
or Search by Category, it will not play and
will give the message Channel Locked
Enter PIN.
Audio SR1 Ch021 Octane
Enter PIN
Category Lists C
OK
Direct Channel
Parental Lock
Channel Skip
Sat Information
12 : 26 pm
12 3
6
5
4
78 9
0
JOL4476
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
All Channels
Pop
Rock
R&B / Urban
Dance
12 : 34 pm
JOL4477
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
040 Wax
041 Sirius Hits
042 Slow Jamz
043 The Express
044 The Vault
Lock All
12 : 34 pm
Edit PIN
Unlock All
JOL4478

207
Satellite Radio
R
Enter the PIN via the keypad which will
subsequently be displayed.
If the correct PIN is entered, the channel
will play. However, the channel will play
only for the current driving cycle and will
again be locked the next time that the
vehicle is started and used.
If the PIN that is entered is incorrect, the
message Entry Invalid - Please try again
will be displayed.
Lost PIN information
If the user loses or forgets the PIN, access
may still be gained and a new PIN
entered, as follows.
Select Sat Options on the satellite radio
screen, to display the Options screen:
•Select Parental Lock 1 on the Sat
Options screen, and hold for 10
seconds - then release.
•Select SAT Information 2 and hold
for 10 seconds - then release.
•After a time-out period, the system
will display User PIN Has Been
Reset.
The PIN will have been reset to the system
default of 1111.
Go to Edit PIN and enter a new number.
Channel Skip
Channel Skip can be used to hide
channels from being selected when using
the seek up and seek down buttons - the
channels are actually skipped, not
hidden.
Select Sat Options on the satellite radio
screen, to display the Options screen:
Select Channel Skip 1 on the Sat
Options screen and the Category List will
be displayed.
Select the Category in which to view the
channels e.g. Pop 2.
When Pop has been selected the
channels within that category will be
displayed.
Audio SR1 Ch021 Octane
Enter PIN
Category Lists C
OK
Direct Channel
Parental Lock
Channel Skip
Sat Information
12 : 26 pm
12 3
6
5
4
78 9
0
JOL4674
1
2
Audio SR1 Ch172 Intimate
User PIN Has been Reset
AM/FM C
OK
Sat Radio
CD
12 3
6
5
4
78 9
0
JOL4668
12 : 26 pm
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
Category Lists
Direct Channel
Parental Lock
Channel Skip
SAT Information
All Channels
Pop
Rock
R&B / Urban
Dance
12 : 34 pm
JOL4479
1
2

Satellite Radio
208
L
Individual channels within a category can
be Skipped by selecting a channel and
pressing Skip.
All channels within a category can be
Skipped by pressing Skip All or
unskipped by pressing Unskip All.
Hidden (skipped) channels are accessible
by Direct Channel Entry.
Note: If same channel is locked and
skipped, then when the channel is
unlocked it will become unskipped.
SAT Information
The SAT Information screen contains the
SIRIUS contact telephone number and
the satellite radio Identification Number.
Select Sat Options on the satellite radio
screen, to display the Options screen.
Select SAT Information on the Sat
Options screen. This information is
displayed automatically when the system
is asking the user to subscribe to SIRIUS.
SUBSCRIPTION TO SIRIUS
When Sat Radio has been selected, but a
subscription to the provider has not been
made, a message will appear, showing
the telephone number of the provider.
Also shown is the SIRIUS ID that
identifies the receiver unit and is linked to
the VIN of the vehicle.
To subscribe, call the number indicated
and quote the SIRIUS ID, this would
normally be done by your Jaguar Dealer.
If SIRIUS has not yet been subscribed to,
the system will tune to the preview
channel - currently number 184. This
channel is accessible for a limited period
only, for approximately 90 days after
purchase of the vehicle.
The ignition system must be ON and the
vehicle must be outdoors in plain view of
the sky whilst authorisation takes place.
This authorisation/activation can take up
to 15 minutes.
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
040 Wax
041 Sirius Hits
042 Slow Jamz
043 The Express
044 The Vault
Skip All
12 : 34 pm
Unskip All
JOL4480
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
Category Lists
Direct Channel
Parental Lock
Channel Skip
SAT Information
12 : 34 pm
Sirius Satellite Radio Inc.
For Subscription Information Call:
888 - 539 - SIRIUS
Your SIRIUS ID: 012345678910
JOL4481
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD
SR1 Ch021 Octane
Audio
Sirius Satellite Radio Inc.
For Subscription Information Call:
888 - 539 - SIRIUS
Your SIRIUS ID: 012345678910
12 : 34 pm
JOL4464

209
Satellite Radio
R
Unsubscribed radio channels
If a channel is selected for which there is
no valid subscription, Unsubscribed
Channel is displayed.
Either subscribe to this selected channel
or select an alternative channel that has
already been subscribed to.
At the bottom of the screen Call SIRIUS
to Subscribe is displayed. Select the
right arrow button to display the
Subscription Details Pop-up screen.
Automatic updates of channels
Occasionally the system will be updated
automatically by SIRIUS.
Whilst updating, the audio will be muted.
When updating has been completed the
update screen details cancel.
After the automatic update procedure, the
following should be noted:
1. All locked channels will be unlocked.
2. All skipped channels will be
unskipped.
Signal acquiring
If the satellite signal is lost, or not found,
Acquiring will be shown on the display.
If the signal is not regained within a few
seconds, all of the relevant soft buttons
will inhibited. The dotted line after
Acquiring will flash until the channel is
regained.
When the signal has been regained, the
selected channel will again play.
Note: This is NOT the same as No
Subscription. The system is only
informing the driver that it cannot find the
signal, perhaps because of very tall
buildings or the vehicle is in a long tunnel.
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane Wax CNBC
Strobe The Pulse ---
Call SIRIUS to Subscribe
Sat Options
SR1 Ch150 Disney
Unsubscribed Channel Settings
Audio
12 : 34 pm
JOL4465
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD
Audio
Sirius Update
Please Wait
60%
12 : 34 pm
JOL4483
AM/FM
Sat Radio
CD Octane Wax CNBC
The Pulse
---
Sat Options
SR2 Acquiring........
Rock Settings
Audio
Spirit
12 : 34 pm
JOL4482

Telephone
210
L
Telephone
WHAT IS BLUETOOTH?
!WARNING:
•Using any hand-held appliance
while driving can be dangerous and
is illegal in certain countries.
•Always stop the vehicle before
making a call and ensure that the
telephone is switched off while you
are driving.
Bluetooth is an international standard that
allows electronic devices to communicate
with each other using a short-range radio
link. Bluetooth eliminates the need for
wires or cables. Typically, devices can
communicate at a range of up to 10
metres (33 feet).
The Bluetooth in-car telephone system
allows certain cell phones to be used
hands free in your vehicle. There is no
need to connect the cell phone to a cradle
or cable.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Note:
•
The vehicle ignition system must be
ON and the touch-screen system
must be active in order to use the
phone.
If your cellphone battery
charge becomes low it may
switch off its Bluetooth link
to the vehicle. This is normal for cell
telephones to help preserve remaining
battery charge. In this event, the
vehicle touch-screen will display a
Phone connection message.
Whilst in a phone call, the
phone uses its own antenna
to communicate to the
cellar network and therefore the
phone reception is controlled by the
cell telephone itself.
The vehicle’s Bluetooth telephone system
can be used with an appropriate,
Bluetooth-equipped cell phone.
Please refer to your Jaguar Dealer for a list
of compatible phones.
The cell phone must be paired and
docked with the vehicle system before
use, see SETTING UP YOUR PHONE on
page -211. Once paired and docked, the
phone can be operated via the steering
wheel switches, the cell phone or the
touch-screen.
The cell phone doesn’t need to be
physically connected to the vehicle, it can
be left in a jacket pocket, for instance.
Calls are routed through the vehicle’s
audio speakers, and a dedicated
microphone is fitted behind the A post
trim on the drivers side.
You can use the system to answer or
reject incoming calls, make outgoing calls
or alter the call volume. The system does
not support SMS text messaging.
Call volume
The volume of the telephone call can be
adjusted for hands-free operation. To
adjust the volume, operate the audio
system’s volume control during a phone
call, see page 184.
If the audio system is in use when the
phone becomes active, the audio system
source is suppressed for the duration of
the call.

211
Telephone
R
The Jaguar telephone system is designed
to function with a variety of Bluetooth
equipped cell phones. The audio and
echo characteristics vary between
models of cell phones, as a result, it may
take a few seconds for the vehicle system
to adapt to provide optimal audio
performance.
In order to achieve the best possible
audio performance, it may be necessary
to reduce the system volume slightly
when using certain cell phones.
SETTING UP YOUR PHONE
Telephone pairing and docking
Before use, your cell phone must be
connected or paired and docked with the
vehicle’s Bluetooth system.
Note: Pairing is the process that uses a
secure communication channel to allow
two Bluetooth devices to recognise each
other e.g. the vehicle and the cell phone.
Docking means that a phone has been
paired, recognised, and now requires to
be connected to the vehicle
Follow these steps to pair/dock your
phone:
1. Switch on your cell phone’s Bluetooth
connection, using the phone’s menu.
Make sure that your cell phone is in
Bluetooth discoverable mode,
sometimes referred to as find me
mode. (See your phone’s manual for
more information.)
2. Switch the vehicle’s ignition system
ON, ensure that the touch-screen
system is active.
3. From the home menu screen select
Phone.
4. If this is the first time that a phone has
been paired to the vehicle select
Search new. The system will search
for all Bluetooth phones that are in
range. If a phone is already docked it
will be automatically undocked when
a search is initiated.
*
Nametags
Register
Voice mail
Answer options
Phone
Phone options
Docked phone: None
Other options
Change phone
Undock
Search new
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
Valet
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0326NAS
Phone
7
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Cancel
Bluetooth search
Please wait . .
Searching . . .
12 : 26 pm
JAG0328NAS

Telephone
212
L
Note: Ensure that the Timeout to
home screen is turned Off before
starting a search sequence, see page
126.
5. If a phone has previously been paired
to the vehicle select Phone then
Settings.
6. Select your phone from displayed list.
7. Once you have selected your phone a
pop-up window appears.
To pair and dock phone enter XXXX
on the handset, XXXX being a random
four digit code displayed on the touch
screen.
Enter this into your phone (see your
phone’s handbook for more
information).
8. Your phone is now paired and docked
ready for use, see Making a Call on
page -217, see Ending a Call on
page -217 and see Receiving a call
on page -218.
Note:
•
Once a cell phone has been paired
and docked with the vehicle, the
system will search for the last
connected phone each time the
ignition is switched ON. You do not
need to manually pair and dock the
phone with the vehicle every time you
switch the ignition ON.
•
If an incorrect code is entered, your
cell phone should prompt you to enter
the correct code.
•
When the vehicle's entertainment
system is active and the last
connected phone comes into range of
the vehicle, the system will attempt to
connect to it.
If a phone call is ongoing when the
phone is connected, the phone call
will be automatically transferred to the
vehicle's microphone and speakers.
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
Valet
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
Options
C
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0327NAS
Phone
Vertu Ascent
Nokia 623
Pair & dock
Delete
Not
Paired
Phone
Cancel
To pair & dock phone
Enter (5616) on handset
12 : 26 pm
JAG0330NAS

213
Telephone
R
If you wish to avoid this occurring
ensure that Bluetooth is turned off at
the phone.
Pairing other phones
Up to five cell phones can be paired with
the vehicle in the same way, however only
one can be docked for use. For further
information, see SETTING UP YOUR
PHONE on page -211, see Changing or
deleting the phone on page -213.
Changing or deleting the phone
Only one phone can be docked to the
vehicle at any one time. To dock a
different paired phone to the vehicle,
follow these steps:
From the home menu screen select
Phone, then Settings then Change
phone.
1. Select Dock from the list of available
phones.
2. Selecting Delete permanently
removes the phone from the list. To
use the phone again you have to pair
and dock the phone to the vehicle,
see SETTING UP YOUR PHONE on
page -211.
Note: The phone does not need to be
present to be deleted from the list.
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
Valet
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
Options
C
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0327NAS
*
Register
Voice mail
Answer options
Phone
Phone options
Docked phone: Motorola Pho....
Other options
Change phone
Undock
Search new
Delete
Phone
Delete
Delete
Dock
Dock
Docked
Paired
Paired
Motorola Pho.....
Nokia 6230
Vertu Ascent
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0331NAS
21

Telephone
214
L
SETTINGS MENUS
Register
From the settings main menu selecting
Register gives the options to Undock,
Change phone or Search new, for
further information,see SETTING UP
YOUR PHONE on page -211 see Pairing
other phones on page -213 or see
Changing or deleting the phone on
page -213.
Voice mail
You can set up your voice mail to be
accessed via the touch-screen. The voice
mail (network service) option is an
answering service where callers who are
unable to reach you can leave you
messages.
Select Voice mail enter the number
provided by your service provider and
press OK. This number is stored in the
system and used to retrieve any voice
mail messages.
Retrieving voice mail
To listen to your voice mail messages
press and hold 1.
The voice mail features can be used as if
dialled from the cell phone.
Answer options
1. Select Answer options.
2. Auto answer.
If automatic answer is on the call will
automatically answer after a few
seconds.
Select Off or On.
7
1
4
*
Register
Voice mail
Answer options
C
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
OKPhone options
12345...
7
1
4
*
Register
Voice mail
Answer options
C
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
OKPhone options
12345678910
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0333NAS
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
Options
C
12 : 26 pm
JAG0334NAS
Register
Voice mail
Answer options
Phone
Phone options
Off On
Auto answer
12 : 26 pm
JAG0335NAS

215
Telephone
R
Phone options
1. Select Phone options 1.
2. Ringtones (Ringtone options).
3. Phonebook (Phonebook options).
Ringtones
Four ringtones are available (for in vehicle
ringing) or you can use your cell phone’s
own ring tone:
Select Ringtones 2, Select Portable’s
inband tone to use your cell phones
ringtone.
Note: Not all phones support inband
ringing.
Note: If the phone is set to silent or
vibrate, inband ringing may not be
available.
Or select Ringtone 1, 2, 3 or 4 to use a
Jaguar preset ringtone.
Note:
The system will store the ring tone setting
associated with each cell phone i.e. can
be set for each paired cell phone.
Phonebook
The phone book option 3, refer to the
illustration on the previous page, allows
you to automatically download your cell
phones directory, erase it from the
vehicle’s memory or refresh it.
The system can store a maximum of 750
entries although this figure varies,
depending on the type of cell phone used,
see Phonebook capacity on page -217.
Register
Voice mail
Answer options
Phone
Phone options
Ringtones
Phonebook
12 : 26 pm
JAG0336NAS
1
3
2
Phone
Portable's inband tone
Ringtone 1
Ringtone 2
Ringtone 3
Ringtone 4
Phone
Portable's inband tone
Ringtone 1
Ringtone 2
Ringtone 3
Ringtone 4
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0337NAS

Telephone
216
L
Note: It may take several minutes to copy
the phone book to the vehicle, depending
on the phone and number of entries
stored. The telephone system may not be
operational during this period.
Auto download
Any phone numbers stored in your cell
phone book can be copied to the
vehicle’s phone system.
If auto download is ON, the cell phone
phonebook will be transferred to the
vehicle every time the phone is connected
(docked).
This feature will only work on phones that
support AT Phonebook Profile, refer to
your phone’s handbook.
To change auto download: Select Phone
options 1. Press Phonebook 3, see
Phone options.
Select Off or On.
Erase entire phonebook
To erase the entire phone book directory:
Select Phone options 1, see page see
Phone options on page -215. Press
Phonebook 3.
Select Erase entire phonebook.
A pop-up window alerts you, that you are
about to Erase entire phonebook. Select
OK to remove all names from the vehicle
directory.
To delete one or more names but not all,
see Names on page -218.
Note:
This feature deletes phonebook entries
stored in the vehicle memory and not
those stored in the cell phone memory.
Register
Voice mail
Answer options
Phone
Phone options
12 : 26 pm
Erase entire phonebook
Off On
Auto
Download
JAG0550NAS
Register
Voice mail
Answer options
Phone
Phone options
12 : 26 pm
Erase entire phonebook
Off On
Auto
Download
JAG0551NAS
Register
Voice mail
Answer options
Phone
Phone options
12 : 26 pm
Start manual download
Erase entire phonebook
Off On
Auto
Download
OK
Phone
Cancel
Erase entire phonebook
JAG0552NAS

217
Telephone
R
Phonebook capacity
Certain cell phones store the phone book
in two different areas, the SIM card and
the phone memory. Where possible the
vehicle will display both SIM card and
phone memory entries up to a maximum
of 750 entries. With some cell phones, the
number of entries from one or both of
these area may be restricted, it is not
always possible to transfer addresses
stored in one or both of these areas.
The number of entries displayed is
dependant upon the number of SIM and
phone memory entries support by the cell
phone.
Note: Certain cell phones do not allow
phone book entries stored on the SIM
card to be transferred via Bluetooth.
However, it may be possible to transfer
the SIM phone book to the cell phone’s
memory, before copying it to the vehicle
phone book. Refer to your cell phone
manual for more information. It is
advisable to remove duplicate and blank
entries from the cell phone before the
phone book is downloaded.
USING YOUR PHONE
Making a Call
Before you make a call, your cell phone
must be connected or paired and docked
with the vehicle’s Bluetooth system, see
SETTING UP YOUR PHONE on
page -211
From the Home menu screen select
Phone.
Key in the phone number, including the
area code, if applicable. The number will
be displayed, press the connect icon.
Changing a phone number
When dialling a number, you can change
the phone number shown on the touch
screen display using the C button.
A momentary press erases any single
digit, a long press erases the complete
number.
Ending a Call
The preferred method to end a call is to
use the hands-free controls on the
steering wheel, see page 220.
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
Options
C
01926648100
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
Valet
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0342NAS

Telephone
218
L
Alternatively, to end a call press end call
icon.
Receiving a call
If the audio system is in use when the
phone becomes active, the audio system
source is suppressed for the duration of
the call.
If automatic answer has been
programmed the call will automatically
answer after a few seconds, see Answer
options on page -214.
To answer
The preferred method to accept an
incoming call, if auto answer is not
active, is to use the hands-free controls
on the steering wheel, see page 220.
Alternatively, you can accept or reject the
incoming call from the pop-up displayed
on the touch-screen.
In-call options
When in a telephone call, Options may be
selected to Microphone mute or
Privacy.
Microphone mute: This will mute your
telephone microphone so that the
receiver of the call cannot hear you.
Privacy: Allows the use of the cell phone
itself and only sends the audio to the cell
phone speaker not the vehicle speakers.
Note: Some phones will switch off the
Bluetooth link to the vehicle when in
Privacy mode.
Ending a received call
To end the call, see Ending a Call on
page -217 above.
Names
Directory name search and Deleting
names
From the Home menu screen select
Phone.
Select Names.
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
Options
C
01926648100
00:03:24
12 : 26 pm
JAG0343NAS
7
4
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
PQRS
GHI
TUV
ABC
JKL
WXYZ
DEF
MNO
Search letter
OK
Home
Audio
Climate
Phone
Navigation
Vehicle
External
Left Right
Valet
71 70
F F
62
F
.5 .0
Radio
90.7 FM1
KALX
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0344NAS

219
Telephone
R
1. Using the keyboard select the first
letter of the contact name.
If name begins with the second or
third letter on the button, press the
button two or three time respectively.
For example, if the name required was
Oliver, the MNO button should be
pressed three times.
2. Select OK.
3. Select the desired name to make a
call. Or select Delete to remove the
name from the directory.
Last 10 option
The Last 10 option allows you to view the
last 10 calls made, received or missed.
From the home menu screen select
Phone.
1. Select Last 10.
2. Select Calls made.
3. Select Calls received or
4. Select Calls missed.
The search fields are opened and a list of
calls made, received or missed are listed,
with the most recent at the top.
To make or return a call select the name
from the list, your call will be routed
automatically.
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
Comms
PQRS
GHI
TUV
ABC
JKL
WXYZ
DEF
MNO
Options
C
Search letter
OK
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
Comms
PQRS
GHI
TUV
ABC
JKL
WXYZ
DEF
MNO
Options
C
M
OK
7
1
4
*
Delete
Phone
Delete
Delete
Delete
Delete
Mark Home
Mark Work
Melissa
Mike Home
Mia Mobile
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0345NAS
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
Comms
Calls missed
Calls made
Calls received
3
2
1
4
12 : 26 pm
JAG0346NAS
7
1
4
*
Phone
Mark Work
01926648100
Kate
Kieran Home
Erin Mobile
12 : 26 pm
JAG0347NAS

Telephone
220
L
Note:
The vehicle will display the list in the order
that they are sent from the cell phone.
Some phones may arrange the list in
reverse or other order.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS
Four system adjustment controls are
situated on the left-hand side of the
steering wheel, duplicating functions of
buttons on the touch screen. The
preferred method of use is by these
buttons to minimise driver distraction.
1. Scroll up/down to increase or
decrease volume.
2. Scroll up/down to next/previous
memory location.
3. SOURCE.
4. Press and hold to access phone
mode.
Momentarily press and release to exit
phone mode.
Making/Ending a call
To dial:
Key in the phone number, including the
area code. The number will be displayed.
To connect press:
on the steering wheel or
on the touch screen.
To end the call press:
on the steering wheel or
on the touch screen.
Continuity of calls
Whilst in a call, the call remains
connected if the vehicle is in
convenience mode. When the call ends,
another call cannot be made or received
through the vehicle system unless the
ignition system is ON and the
touch-screen system active
(START/STOP button pressed).
JAG0348G
1 2
4 3

221
Telephone
R
Other features
Do not disturb mode
If you do not wish to be
disturbed by incoming phone
calls press the bell icon 1 on the
touch screen. A visual representation will
be displayed on the touch screen to
advise the driver that Do not disturb mode
is selected 3 and Do not disturb mode
will be visible when in telephone mode (2).
Any incoming calls will be rejected or
diverted to voice mail, see 214.
Keyboard zoom
This option allows the user to increase the
keyboard size.
When making a call using your numerical
key pad displayed on the touch screen,
the zoom icon becomes selectable.
Select the zoom icon to enlarge the
keypad size.
Select the zoom icon again to reduce the
size.
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
Options
Do not disturb mode
C
12 : 26 pm
JAG0352NAS
2
1
3
7
1
4
*
Digit Dial
Names
Last 10
Settings
Phone
7
1
4
*
8
2
5
0
9
3
6
Options
C
7
1
4
*
DigiDial
Names
Last 10
Phone
Comms
23
46
789
C
*0
5
1
Options
12 : 26 pm
12 : 26 pm
JAG0353NAS
7
1
4
*
DigiDial
Names
Last 10
Phone
Comms
23
46
789
C
*0
5
1
Options
12 : 26 pm
JAG0354NAS

Emergency Equipment
222
L
Chapter 7
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
!WARNING:
Do not use a fire extinguisher closer
than 2.4 m (8 feet) to the base of a liquid
fire as the force may splatter the
burning liquid to the surrounding area.
Dealer Fitted Fire Extinguisher
Your Jaguar Dealer can supply and fit
one.
Factory Fitted Fire Extinguisher
Mexican vehicles have a factory fitted fire
extinguisher which contains 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)
of BC powder pressurised with nitrogen
to a working pressure of 12 bar (180 psi)
at 20°C (68°F).
This extinguisher can be used on liquid
fires, electrical equipment fires and, if no
explosion risk, gasoline fires.
To operate the fire extinguisher, follow the
instructions as stated on the extinguisher.
Do not test the fire extinguisher prior to
use. Partial discharge will render the
extinguisher inoperative.
Maintenance
Every six months:
•Remove the extinguisher from its
bracket and check that the nozzle is
clear.
•Check that any fitted safety devices
are secure.
•If fitted, check pressure gauge is
reading within limits. If the gauge is
indicating incorrect limits, the
extinguisher may not work in an
emergency. Seek qualified assistance
immediately.
WARNING TRIANGLE
A warning triangle, designed to
international standards, is standard
equipment in certain countries.
Coupe: The warning triangle is stowed
under the luggage compartment load
floor.
Convertible: The warning triangle is
stowed in the luggage compartment lid.
Mexico only: The two warning triangles
are stored in a bag stowed in the luggage
compartment.
In an emergency, remove the triangle(s)
and unfold its stand legs. Place the
triangle(s) in the road in accordance with
local traffic regulations to give oncoming
traffic warning of an immobilised vehicle.
Hazard warning lights must be used with
the warning triangle.
FIRST AID KIT
Your Jaguar Dealer has first aid kits
available.

223
Status After a Collision
R
Status Afte r a Collis ion
DRIVING AFTER A COLLISION
If the vehicle is involved in a collision, the
functionality of the vehicle could be
reduced.
Depending upon the severity of the
collision the following vehicle functions
may come into effect:
•engine shut down
•inertia switch tripped, which cuts off
the fuel pumps
•doors unlock
•hazard and interior lights come on (the
hazard lights will remain on until the
inertia switch is reset)
•the message centre will display
INERTIA SWITCH TRIPPED
•exterior lights will maintain their state.
ATTEMPTING TO START THE
VEHICLE
!WARNING:
To reduce the risk of fire or personal
injury, do not under any
circumstances, attempt to start the
vehicle if you see or smell fuel.
The inertia switch may have been tripped
by the collision. This will cut off the fuel
pumps. The switch must be reset before
the engine will start.
Resetting the switch
If no fuel leak is apparent:
1. Press the engine START/STOP
button, without pressing the brake
pedal, to turn the ignition back to
convenience mode (ignition OFF).
Wait for approximately 10 seconds.
2. Press the engine START/STOP button
again, without pressing the brake
pedal, to turn the ignition ON. Wait 30
seconds.
3. Make a further check for fuel leaks.
4. Press the START/STOP button with
the brake pedal depressed to start the
engine as normal.
MOVING THE VEHICLE
If the engine starts, the vehicle may be
moved carefully to a position of safety. Do
not move the vehicle further than
necessary.
Recovery
Even if the vehicle appears driveable after
the collision, it should not be driven or
towed. Concealed damage could make
the vehicle impossible to manoeuvre. See
page 224.

Vehicle Recovery
224
L
Vehicle Recovery
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
Jaguar strongly recommend that the
vehicle is recovered by use of a slide-bed
recovery transporter only.
Caution:
•Ensure that the recovery team do
not tow with sling-type,
spectacle-type or towing dolly
equipment as damage to the front
or rear underside bodywork may
result.
•If the vehicle has an inoperable
transmission, to prevent further
damage, it must be towed with the
rear wheels clear of the ground.
Transporting
If the vehicle is being transported the
parkbrake must be applied, the wheels
chocked and the gear selector lever
moved to position N or D but never to P.
While the vehicle is being loaded, the
Jaguar Smart Key should be placed in the
starter control unit. This will prevent the
steering lock activating.
The vehicle must be securely tied down to
the transporter or trailer. Use straps on
the front wheels and tires to secure the
vehicle for transportation.
The towing eye is not designed for
securing the vehicle during
transportation.
JAG0355G

225
Vehicle Recovery
R
Vehicle failure
!WARNING:
Without the engine running, the brake
servo and power steering pump cannot
provide assistance: greater effort will
therefore be required to operate the
brake pedal and turn the steering
wheel. Longer stopping distances will
also be experienced.
The removable towing eye is primarily for
emergency use when towing for short
distances, e.g. removing the vehicle if it is
causing an obstruction or for winching the
vehicle onto a recovery transporter. To
prevent damage while the vehicle is being
towed with the rear wheels on the ground,
towing distance must be restricted to
0.8 kilometres (0.5 miles). Towing speed
must not exceed 48 km/h (30 mph).
When being towed, the transmission must
be in neutral (N) with the ignition system
switched to convenience mode to
release the steering lock and render the
indicators, horn and brake lights
operational.

Vehicle Recovery
226
L
TOWING POINTS
!WARNING:
Avoid body contact with a hot exhaust
pipe when fitting any equipment to the
rear towing points.
Caution:
•The towing eye is not suitable for
solid bar towing.
•Care must be taken to avoid
damaging the bumpers and front
apron.
A screw-in front towing eye is provided in
the luggage compartment with the jack.
The towing eye has a left-hand thread and
must be screwed in a counter-clockwise
direction when fitting.
The front towing point is located behind a
plastic cover on the left-hand side of the
vehicle (as viewed from the front).
1. To access the towing point, press the
plastic cover on the top to unclip.
Remove the cover.
2. Screw the towing eye into the vehicle,
right up to the shoulder.
3. The rear tie-down point is in the centre
of the vehicle to the rear of the
exhaust silencer.
Use this point only when the vehicle is
to be towed rearwards on straight
level ground for the least amount of
distance possible or loading onto a
recovery vehicle.
1
JAG0356G
2
3

227
Vehicle Care
R
Chapter 8
!WARNING:
Many liquids and other substances
used in vehicles are poisonous and
should never be consumed and must
be kept away from open wounds.
These substances include antifreeze,
brake fluid, fuel, windshield washer
additives, lubricants and various
adhesives.
Caution: Read individual product
warnings before using any car cleaning
or washing products.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
!WARNING:
Dry cleaning fluids may be toxic or
flammable. Take adequate precautions
when handling these products.
Brush and clean the interior regularly. Use
a vacuum cleaner where possible to
remove all dust from the interior and trim.
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Washing your vehicle
For best results, do not wash the vehicle
under strong sunlight. Always allow the
vehicle to cool down before washing.
Do not use a dry cloth to wipe dirty
paintwork. Dust and gritty substances are
abrasive and will scratch the paintwork.
Remove dirt using a cellulose sponge and
plenty of warm (never hot) water. Rinse off
with clean water and dry using a clean,
damp chamois leather.
Do not use household soaps or
detergents. The use of Jaguar Vehicle
Shampoo is recommended.
Using an automatic wash
Caution:
•Ensure that AUTO, wipers, is not
selected when entering a car wash
or damage to the wiper blades and
arms can occur as they will operate
in the car wash.
•Ensure that the audio system is
turned OFF so that the aerial is
retracted.
Note: Regular use of automatic car
washes tends to dull the lustre of the
paintwork.
After leaving the car wash, switch on the
windshield wiper immediately to remove
water and prevent a build up of wax.
Convertible top fabric
Caution:
•Do not use an automatic car wash
that has rotating brushes.
The action of the brushes may
damage the exterior fabric or the
seals of the convertible top.
•Do not use spot cleaners, chemical
dilutants or any organic cleaners. If
in doubt, contact your Jaguar
Dealer.
JAG0437G

Vehicle Care
228
L
To maintain the appearance and
condition of the convertible top, the
recommendations given below should be
followed. This is of particular importance
in the case of light coloured tops.
Do not leave the top in the open (folded)
position for longer than is necessary, as in
certain circumstances permanent soiling
along the folds may occur.
Cleaning: Every 1 600 km (1 000 miles)
vacuum clean and wash the convertible
top using the Jaguar Soft Top Cleaning
Kit, carefully following the instructions
enclosed.
Reproofing: Every 8 000 km (5 000 miles)
reproof the top using the solution in the
cleaning kit, carefully following the
instructions enclosed.
Preparation for Winter
Before the onset of Winter, it is advisable
to coat the convertible top seals and
respective body seals with a compound,
such as Carbaflo KSP 105, to aid
operation in freezing conditions.
This action will need to be repeated at the
start of each Winter to maintain
protection.
Care must be taken so that the compound
does not come into contact with the
convertible top material. For further
advise you should contact your Jaguar
Dealer.
Aerial care
Regular cleaning with a special aerial
cleaner, will ensure smooth and reliable
operation of the aerial.
In freezing conditions check that no ice
has formed over the top of the aerial,
which could prevent it being raised and
cause damage to the motor.
The Jaguar Aerial Cleaning Kit contains
the necessary maintenance items.
Using a high pressure washer
Caution: Some high pressure cleaning
systems are sufficiently powerful to
penetrate door and window seals and
damage rubbing strips and locking
mechanisms. Never aim the water jet
directly at heater air intakes, body
seals, the convertible top, or at any
componant that might easily be
damaged.
When salt is used on the roads, wash the
vehicle immediately after encountering
such conditions. Clean undersides and
wheel arches using a high pressure jet.
Underhood cleaning
Caution: Do not use a high pressure
washer or steam cleaner in the engine
compartment. Damage to components
could occur.
Glass surfaces
Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to
avoid damaging the heating element. DO
NOT scrape the glass or use any abrasive
cleaning fluid.
Mirror glass is particularly susceptible to
damage. Wash with soapy water. DO
NOT use abrasive cleaning compounds or
metal scrapers to remove ice.
The following products will ensure glass
surfaces and windshield wipers are kept
in good condition:
Jaguar Screen Clean Paste – Apply to the
exterior of the windshield only to ensure
effective operation of the windshield
wiper.
Jaguar Glass Cleaner – Interior and
exterior of all other glass surfaces.

229
Vehicle Care
R
Jaguar Screen Wash – Washer reservoir
additive.
Jaguar Winter Care Kit comprising
de-icer, ice scraper, anti-mist wipe cloth
and aerial cleaner – for use in adverse
weather conditions.
Cleaning the rear screen
To avoid damaging the heating elements,
when cleaning the inside of the rear
screen use only a soft damp cloth or
chamois leather. Do not use solvents or
sharp objects to clean the glass.
Care of alloy road wheels
The alloy road wheels are covered with a
protective anti-corrosion coating. To
prevent corrosion it is essential that this
coating is not damaged.
When removing or fitting tires always
advise the tire fitter to treat the alloy
wheels with great care. Tire levers must
not be used.
Wash the wheels regularly with soap and
water to avoid an accumulation of
particles. In salty conditions the wheels
should be cleaned more frequently.
Jaguar acid-free wheel cleaner can be
used to remove heavy soiling. Do not use
non-approved acid based cleaners.
Removing Grease and Tar
Remove grease or tar with Jaguar Tar
Remover or methylated spirit (alcohol).
White spirit is also effective, but must not
be applied to rubber, particularly the
windshield wiper blades.
Bird Droppings
Do not allow bird droppings or tree sap to
harden. Remove from paintwork
immediately with a lukewarm soap and
water solution.
Polishing
For maximum protection against road
dust, salts, industrial fall-out etc., it is
recommended that the vehicle is polished
regularly using Jaguar polish and a
polishing cloth.
Note: The vehicle’s brightwork should be
cleaned in the same way as the paintwork:
Chrome polish or other abrasive cleaners
must not be used.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Caution: To prevent airbag damage,
the steering wheel centre pad and
other areas containing airbags should
only be cleaned sparingly with a damp
cloth, warm water and a non-detergent
soap. Do not allow these areas to be
flooded with chemical solvents, liquids,
furniture cream or polishes.
Leather
Leather is an easy to maintain natural
product, however, dust and substances
can penetrate the pores and crease the
leather, causing surface wear and
brittleness.
To prevent ingrained dirt and staining,
inspect the seat upholstery regularly and
clean every one to two months as follows:
•Wipe off fine dust from the seat
surfaces using a clean, damp,
non-coloured cloth. Change
frequently to a clean area of cloth to
avoid abrasive action on the leather
surface. Avoid over-wetting.
•If this is not sufficient, use a cloth
which has been dampened with warm
soapy water and then wrung out. Use
only mild non-caustic soap.

Vehicle Care
230
L
•Use Jaguar Leather Cleaner for
heavily soiled areas. Dry off and rub
with a clean soft cloth, changing
surfaces regularly.
When staining (e.g. from clothing) or
spillage occurs, clean the affected area
immediately as described above.
Use Jaguar Leather Cleaner several times
a year to maintain its appearance and
suppleness. The cleaner will nourish and
moisturise and help to improve the
surface protective film against dust and
substances.
•Do not use solvents. Do not use
detergents, furniture polish or
household cleaners. While these
products may initially give impressive
results, their use will lead to rapid
deterioration of the leather and will
invalidate the warranty. Jaguar
recommend a basic set of products
that have been specially selected for
the type of leather in your vehicle.
•Dark clothing may stain leather seats
just like other upholstery products.
•Sharp objects such as belts, zip
fasteners, rivets, etc. can leave
permanent scratches and scratch
marks on the leather surface.
•Unless spillages such as tea, coffee or
ink are washed away immediately,
permanent staining may have to be
accepted.
If a valet service is used, ensure that the
specialist concerned is aware of, and
follows these instructions precisely.
Cloth and fabric
Caution:
•Never use soap, ammonia, bleach
or other cleaners intended for use
on hard surfaces.
•Do not use upholstery cleaner on
electrical equipment such as facia
switches.
•When cleaning around electrical
equipment such as switches,
ensure that fluids do not leak into
any gaps around the components
or between panels or trim.
Use Jaguar Upholstery Cleaner, following
the instructions. Do not over wet.
Removing stains
Most stains on woollen fabric can be
removed if treatment is carried out
immediately, before the stain has a
chance to dry-in.
Most stains can be treated with one of
three cleaning fluids: Jaguar Upholstery
Cleaner, dry cleaning fluid or clean water.
Follow the instructions on the package.
Carpet and mats
Marks or stains can be removed by gentle
scrubbing with a weak solution of soap
and warm water.
For more stubborn stains a commercially
available carpet cleaner should be used.

231
Vehicle Care
R
Floor mat retention
The driver’s floor mat must be correctly
positioned and secured under the
tongues on the retention posts (only one
post shown). Ensure that the mat does
not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator or brake pedal.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Paint chips
Scratches and chips should be touched in
before weathering action begins. Inspect
the paintwork immediately after the
vehicle has been washed.
JAG0357L

Maintenance
232
L
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Protect the environment
We must all play our part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication
materials are significant steps towards
this aim.
Avoid using high engine speeds. This will
protect your engine, reduce fuel
consumption, lower the engine noise level
and help towards reducing the
environmental burden.
Dispose of used parts and fluids at your
local authorised waste disposal facilities.
Regular Servicing
Caution: Severe damage to the
electrical system and electronic
components can occur if any attempt
is made to diagnose faults in the
electrical system using conventional
diagnostic equipment (for example, the
use of test lamps or low impedance
voltmeters). The fitting of any electrical
accessory should only be entrusted to
a Jaguar Dealer.
Regular maintenance and servicing is the
responsibility of the owner. Failure to
implement maintenance at the
recommended intervals could result in
deterioration of vehicle performance and
possible infringement of regulations.
Your Jaguar Dealer will be pleased to
arrange periodic servicing in accordance
with the Passport to Service (USA and
Canada) or Service Portfolio (Mexico).
Warranty - USA and Canada
The Passport to Service contains
warranties applicable to the vehicle,
which include:
•The Limited Vehicle Warranty.
•The Emission Control System
Warranty and covered parts list.
•The Corrosion Warranty.
Tires are not warranted by Jaguar Cars
Limited, but by the specific manufacturer
of the tires on the vehicle. Details of tire
warranties are included in the vehicle
literature pack.
Warranty - Mexico
The Warranty Benefits booklet contains
warranties applicable to the vehicle,
which include:
•The Limited Vehicle Warranty.
•The Emission Control System
Warranty and covered parts list.
•The Corrosion Warranty.
Owner maintenance
In addition to the routine services and
inspections, a number of simple checke
must be carried out more frequently. You
can carry out these checks yourself.
Any significant or sudden drop in fluid
levels, or uneven tyre wear, should be
reported to a Jaguar Dealer/Authorised
Repairer without delay.
Daily checks
•Operation of lamps, horn, direction
indicators, wipers, washers and
warning indicators.
•Operation of seat belts and brakes.

233
Maintenance
R
•Look for fluid deposits underneath the
vehicle that might indicate a leak.
Condensation drips from air
conditioning is normal.
Weekly checks
•Engine oil level.
Note: The engine oil level should be
checked more frequently if the vehicle
is driven for prolonged periods at high
speeds.
•Brake fluid level.
•Power steering fluid level.
•Screen washer fluid level.
•Tyre pressures and condition.
•Operate air conditioning.
Monthly
Wiper blades - Check the quality of the
wipe. If smearing or juddering is evident,
clean the windshield and renew the wiper
blades.

Maintenance
234
L
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
!WARNING:
When working within the engine
compartment, take care to avoid
contact with moving parts and hot
components.
The hood lock release control is below the
facia on the left-hand side of the vehicle.
To open: Release the hood lock by
pulling the lever. Reach across to the
centre rear edge of the hood and lift. The
gas filled struts will assist raising the
hood, and retain it in the fully open
position.
!WARNING:
Before closing the hood ensure that no
one is obstructing the closing area and
that hands and clothes are clear.
Caution: Do not press downward on
the top of the hood to close it,
especially within the final centimetres
(inches) of closing, as this may damage
the hood.
Hood latching: Close the hood to within
a distance of 30 cm to 35 cm
(12 to 14 inches) of the fully closed
position, then let go to allow the hood to
shut.
To check that the hood is closed, pull the
hood upwards to ensure that both the
right-hand and left-hand latches are
engaged.
JAG0359G

235
Maintenance
R
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OVERVIEW
Normally aspirated engine
1. Coolant reservoir.
2. Windshield and headlamp washer
reservoir.
3. Engine oil filler.
4. Brake reservoir.
5. Engine oil dipstick.
6. Power steering reservoir.
JAG0363N
1 2
3
4
5
6

Maintenance
236
L
Supercharged engine
1. Coolant reservoir.
2. Windshield and headlamp washer
reservoir.
3. Engine oil filler.
4. Brake reservoir.
5. Engine oil dipstick.
6. Power steering reservoir.
JAG0559N
1 2
3
4
5
6

237
Maintenance
R
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Caution:
•If the message ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE LOW is displayed, stop
the engine immediately and seek
qualified assistance. Do not start
the engine until the cause has been
identified and rectified.
•Your vehicle’s warranty may be
invalidated if damage is caused by
the use of improper engine oil. Low
quality or obsolete oils do not
provide the protection required by
modern, high performance engines.
Failure to use an oil that meets the
required specification could cause
excessive engine wear, a build up
of sludge and deposits and
increased pollution. It could also
lead to engine failure.
•Do not use oil additives of any type
as engine damage could occur. Use
only specified lubricants.
Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of oil consumption is
normal. The rate of consumption will
depend on the following:
•the quality and viscosity of the oil
•climatic conditions
•the speed at which the engine is being
operated
•road conditions.
Drivers should expect above normal
consumption when the engine is new.
Check the oil level regularly with the
vehicle on flat, level ground.
Check the oil level with the engine
completely cold.
To check engine oil level
Remove the dipstick 1 and wipe clean
with a lint free cloth. Replace fully, then
withdraw the dipstick. If the oil level is
above the lower of the two dots on the
dipstick then no additional oil is required.
If the oil level is at or below the lower of
the two dots, remove the oil filler cap 2
and add oil, to the quantity and
specification shown on page 238.
Refit the filler cap and hand tighten
securely until one click is heard.
JAG0364G
21

Maintenance
238
L
Recommended engine oil
Jaguar recommends
When the oil level is at the lower dipstick
mark, add 1litres (1.1 US quart) of oil.
Oil specification
API SM and ILSAC GF-4.
When topping up between
oil changes, make sure that
you use oil that has the
correct quality level (API
service) and viscosity grade.
Note: For maximum fuel economy, 5W-30
oil is recommended.
Engine oil temperature ranges
For climates ranging from -35°C (– 31°F)
to + 50°C (+ 122°F), the following oil
viscosities may be used:
0W–30 will protect from -35°C (– 31°F) to
+ 35°C (+ 95°F).
5W–30 (preferred) will protect from -30°C
(–22°F) to +35°C (+95°F).
0W–40 will protect from – 35°C (– 31°F) to
+ 50°C (+ 122°F).
5W–40 will protect from –30°C (–22°F) to
+50°C (+122°F).
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
!WARNING:
•It is unsafe to run the engine in an
overheated condition.
•The radiator cooling fans may
continue to run after the ignition
has been switched off but will
automatically switch off when the
engine has cooled sufficiently.
•Do not remove the coolant
reservoir filler cap while the engine
is hot. If it is essential, then protect
your hands against escaping
steam. Slowly turn the cap counter
clockwise to allow the steam
pressure to escape completely
before removing the cap.
Caution: If persistent coolant loss is
noticed, seek qualified assistance
immediately.
Check the level only when the engine is
cold. The coolant level should be between
the MAX and MIN indicators. If persistent
coolant loss is noticed, seek qualified
assistance immediately.
JAG0365G

239
Maintenance
R
If the message centre displays the
message ENGINE OVERHEATING, pull
over and allow the engine to idle for five
minutes and then switch off for ten
minutes. Switch on and provided that the
warning does not recur, continue your
journey avoiding harsh acceleration. Seek
qualified assistance as soon as possible.
Topping up
!WARNING:
•Do not allow antifreeze to make
contact with skin or eyes. If this
should happen, rinse the affected
area immediately with plenty of
water.
•Coolant fluid is toxic and in
concentrated form is flammable.
Observe all warnings indicated on
the container.
Caution: Antifreeze will damage
paintwork. Wash off immediately if
spillage occurs.
Top up with a mixture of 50% water and
50% antifreeze until the coolant is
between the MAX and MIN. This 50/50%
mixture gives frost protection for
temperatures down
to – 40°C (– 40°F). Use antifreeze to
specification WSS M97B44, coloured
orange, Extended Life Coolant.
Refit the filler cap and hand-tighten
securely until one click is heard.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
!WARNING:
•Windshield washer fluid is toxic and
in concentrated form is flammable.
Observe all warnings on the washer
solution container.
•Under no circumstances must
cooling system antifreeze be used,
since this will damage the
paintwork.
The washer reservoir contains the fluid for
the windshield washers and the headlamp
powerwash system.
Fill with Jaguar Windshield Washer Fluid
diluted with clean soft water as specified
in the instructions on the bottle. Do not
over fill.
Using a non-approved fluid may
adversely affect the wiper blade rubber,
resulting in ineffectual and noisy wiping.
JAG0366G

Maintenance
240
L
Cold weather precautions
To prevent damage to the pump during
freezing conditions, use Jaguar
Windshield Washer Fluid at the strength
shown on the bottle, for the anticipated
ambient temperature.
Caution: State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a common
windshield washer anti-freeze additive.
Washer fluids containing
non-methanol anti-freeze agents
should be used only if they provide cold
weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades
or washer system.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
!WARNING:
The fluid level will drop as the brake
pads wear. If the level is very low the
brake warning indicator will illuminate
and a message BRAKE FLUID LOW will
be displayed. Seek qualified assistance
immediately. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause is rectified as driving
under such conditions could result in
extended stopping distances or
complete brake failure.
Caution:
•While handling brake fluid, take
extreme care; brake fluid can
damage the vehicle paintwork.
•Always use fresh, clean fluid from a
new container. Never introduce
used brake fluid into the system.
The fluid is visible through the translucent
casing of the reservoir and must be
maintained at the MAX mark.
Topping up:
1. Remove the reservoir top cover.
2. Clean the reservoir and cap
thoroughly with a lint free cloth to
ensure that no foreign matter enters
the reservoir.
3. Unscrew the filler cap and top up to
the MAX level using brake fluid to
specification Shell DOT 4 ESL or low
viscosity DOT 4 brake fluid that meets
ISO 4925 class 6 specification. Only
fluid of this type and standard may be
used.
JAG0369N

241
Maintenance
R
4. Refit the filler cap securely and refit
the cover.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Caution: It is imperative that the power
steering system does not become
contaminated in any way. Always use
new fluid and clean the area around the
reservoir neck both before and after
topping up.
1. Check the fluid level when the engine
is COLD and the vehicle is on a flat,
level surface.
2. Wipe clean and remove the filler cap
from the reservoir; take great care to
prevent any foreign matter from
entering.
3. Check that the fluid level is between
the marks on the reservoir dipstick.
4. If necessary, top up with DEXRON III
power steering fluid, DO NOT
OVERFILL.
5. Refit the filler cap.
If the level be very low, seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.
JAG0370G

Vehicle Battery
242
L
Vehicle Battery
BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS
There is a label on the battery depicting a
number of warning signs. The warning
signs are as follows:
No smoking, no flames, no sparks (Red).
Shield eyes (Blue).
Keep away from children (Red).
Explosive gas (Yellow).
Battery acid (Yellow).
1. DANGER/POISON
2. NO
•SPARKS
•FLAMES
•SMOKING
3. FLUSH EYES IMMEDIATELY
GET MEDICAL HELP FAST
4. SULFURIC ACID can cause blindness
or severe burns
5. KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF
CHILDREN
DO NOT TIP
KEEP VENT CAP TIGHT AND LEVEL
6. SHIELD EYES
EXPLOSIVE GASES CAN CAUSE
BLINDNESS OR INJURY
JAG0443N

243
Vehicle Battery
R
BATTERY CARE
!WARNING:
•The cell plugs and vent pipe must
be in place at all times when the
battery is in the vehicle. Failure to
fit, or incorrect fitting of these items
is potentially hazardous. Ensure
that the vent pipe is free from kinks
or damage.
•If battery acid comes into contact
with skin or eyes immediately rinse
with cold water and consult a
doctor.
•Never charge or boost a frozen
battery.
•Switch off ignition before
disconnecting battery terminals.
Always disconnect the ground
terminal first and reconnect last.
•Do not let battery acid come into
contact with painted surfaces or
fabric.
•California Proposition 65:
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories, contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
A low maintenance battery specifically
designed for use with this vehicle is fitted
in the luggage compartment.
In hot climates more frequent checks of
the battery electrolyte level are required. If
necessary, the battery cells can be
topped up with distilled water.
The exterior of the battery should be
occasionally wiped clean to remove any
dirt or grease.
Note: Do not connect any 12 volt
equipment, (for example, a 12 volt lamp),
directly to the battery terminals. Use the
accessory socket located in the glove box
for connecting Jaguar approved
accessories.
Replacement batteries
!WARNING:
Only fit a replacement battery of the
same type and specification as the
original - other batteries may vary in
size or have different terminal
positions which could cause a fire
hazard when connected to the
vehicle’s electrical system.
Battery disposal
Used batteries should be recycled.
However, batteries are hazardous - you
should seek advice about disposal from a
Jaguar Dealer or your local authority.
USING BOOSTER CABLES
!WARNING:
•Always wear appropriate eye
protection when working with
batteries.
•During normal use, batteries emit
explosive hydrogen gas - ensure
sparks and naked lights are kept
away from the engine
compartment.
•Do not attempt to start the vehicle if
the electrolyte in the battery is
suspected of being frozen.

Vehicle Battery
244
L
•Make sure both batteries are of the
same voltage (12 volts), and that the
booster cables have insulated
clamps and are approved for use
with 12 volt batteries.
•Do not disconnect the discharged
battery.
•Do not connect positive (+)
terminals to negative (-) terminals,
and ensure booster cables are kept
away from any moving parts in the
engine compartment.
•Take care when working near
rotating parts of the engine.
Caution:
•If using a boost start vehicle, under
no circumstances should the
vehicles come into contact with
each other. This could establish an
earth connection, which may cause
sparks and damage.
•Do not run the boost start vehicle’s
engine when boost starting a
Jaguar vehicle. If the boost start
vehicle’s engine is running and the
jump leads are disconnected,
damage to the Jaguar vehicle’s
electrical system will result.
This vehicle is fitted with automatic
transmission. In the event of a discharged
battery preventing a normal engine start,
the vehicle cannot be started by pushing
or towing. Either use booster cables
connected to a booster battery (e.g. on
another vehicle) or fit a fully charged
battery.
Using booster cables (jump leads) from a
donor battery, or a battery fitted to a
donor vehicle, is the only approved
method of starting a vehicle with a
discharged battery. This procedure differs
to that used to charge a battery, which
should not be attempted with the battery
connected to the vehicle.
Boosting from another vehicle
!WARNING:
Do not use a 24 volt booster start
system. These produce excessive
voltage and can damage the vehicle’s
electrical system.
If a donor vehicle is to be used, both
vehicles should be parked with their
battery locations adjacent to each other.
Ensure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Apply the parkbrakes and ensure that the
transmission of both vehicles is set in
neutral (P - park for vehicles with
automatic transmission).
Ensure that both vehicles have all
electrical services OFF.
Where the booster cables are of a
different colour, e.g. red and black, use
red for positive (+). This aids identification
and helps to avoid crossing positive (+) to
negative (–). Take extra care to avoid
crossing the polarity when using cables of
the same colour.

245
Vehicle Battery
R
Procedure for using booster cables
The following procedure must be followed
exactly:
1. Remove the left-hand side luggage
compartment trim panel cover to
access the vehicle battery positive (+)
remote charge terminal, remove the
protective cap from the terminal.
2. Attach one end of the red jump lead to
the positive (+) terminal of the booster
battery and the other end to the
positive (+) remote charge terminal of
the vehicle battery.
3. Lift the luggage compartment floor
panel to reveal the spare wheel.
Remove the protective cap from the
negative (-) terminal of the vehicle
battery remote charge terminal.
4. Attach one end of the black jump lead
to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster battery and the other end to
the negative (-) terminal of the vehicle
battery remote charge terminal.
5. Start the disabled vehicle. Allow the
engine to idle for five minutes before
disconnecting the cables.
6. Disconnect the black jump lead from
the negative (-) terminal of the vehicle
battery remote charge terminal and
the booster battery negative (-)
terminal.
7. Disconnect the red jump lead from the
positive (+) remote charge terminal of
the vehicle and the booster battery
positive (+) terminal.
8. Refit the terminal covers, trim panel
and luggage compartment floor
panel.
It may be necessary to reset the electric
parkbrake, see page 164. See also 246.
CHARGING THE VEHICLE
BATTERY
!WARNING:
Batteries produce combustible gas
(hydrogen) when being charged. The
battery must be removed from the
vehicle before charging commences.
Due to the restricted accessibility of the
centrally located battery, charging of the
battery should be assigned to qualified
assistance.
JAG0373G

Vehicle Battery
246
L
If the message BATTERY NOT
CHARGING is displayed there is either a
generator or battery fault. Turn off all
electrical accessories, radio, climate
control etc. Try to use minimum electrical
load as possible such as power windows,
convertible top etc. Seek qualified
assistance as soon as possible.
Effects of battery disconnection
After reconnecting the battery:
•Reset the electric parkbrake; see
page 164.
•Reset the electrically operated
windows anti-trap function; see page
87.
•The trip computer will lose all
recorded trip data and all trip
functions will be reset to zero. The
vehicle total odometer reading is
retained.
•If the battery is disconnected for more
than 72 hours the radio preset
channels will need to be reset.
•Reset the clock to the correct time,
see page 142.
•Recalibrate the seat memory
positions; see page 139.
The engine electronic control system
automatically adapts to certain
characteristics of the vehicle. When the
battery is disconnected, these
adaptations are lost.
On reconnection, therefore, some slightly
abnormal drive symptoms may occur and
the vehicle may need to be driven
16 kilometers (10 miles) or more while the
control system re-adapts.
When the vehicle main battery is
disconnected and then reconnected, the
security system immediately returns to
the state that it was when the battery was
disconnected.
Note: Ensure that a remote handset is
available to disarm the system when
reconnecting the battery. Either press the
unlock button on the transmitter, or press
the START/STOP button for
convenience mode.

Wheels and Tires
256
L
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Tire glossary
Refer to page 278 for a glossary of terms
and definitions associated with tire
pressures and vehicle weights.
Tire pressures
!WARNING:
Improperly inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
possibly resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Caution: Never exceed the maximum
pressure stated on the sidewall. Over
inflation could cause the tire to fail
suddenly.
In the interest of safety, reliability and fuel
efficiency, check the tires, including the
spare, for condition and pressure on a
weekly basis and before long journeys.
Pressure checks must be carried out
when the tires are cold and the vehicle
has been standing in ambient local
conditions for at least one hour.
Do not check tire pressures immediately
after the vehicle has travelled in excess of
1.6 km (1mile). Tire temperatures and
pressures increase when running.
Deflating a warm tire to the recommended
pressure will result in under inflation.
If tire pressures are checked while the
vehicle is inside a protected covered area,
e.g. a garage, and subsequently driven in
lower outdoor temperatures, tire under
inflation could occur.
A slight pressure loss occurs naturally
with time. If this exceeds 0.14 bar
(2 lbf/in2, 14 kPa) per week, have the
cause investigated and rectified by a
qualified assistance.
If winter tires are fitted, please refer to the
winter tire pressure information on page
265.
Tire pressure label
(Canada and Mexico only)
A tire recommendation label is located on
the end of driver’s door, giving
information specific to the vehicle’s wheel
and tire equipment.
These pressures provide optimum ride
and handling characteristics for all normal
operating conditions.
JAG0057G

257
Wheels and Tires
R
Tire pressure label/placard (USA only)
A tire information label is visible on the
pillar behind the driver’s door (also known
as the B pillar), giving information specific
to the wheel and tire equipment fitted to
the vehicle when it was built.
These pressures provide optimum ride
and handling characteristics for all normal
operating conditions.
The label contains the following
information:
•The maximum number of occupants
1, divided between the front 2 and
rear 3 of the vehicle.
•The vehicle capacity weight 4, which
includes the weight of the driver,
passengers and cargo.
•Cold inflation pressures for the front,
rear and spare tire 5.
•The size of the tires 6 with which the
vehicle was originally equipped.
Note: The label must not be changed,
even if different wheels are fitted at a
later stage.
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
SEE OWNER’S
MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
SEATING CAPACITY
TOTAL 4
FRONT 2 REAR 2
TIRE COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
FRONT
REAR
SPARE
XXX/XXRXX
TXXX/XXRXX
XXPSI XXXkpa
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXXXlbs
RTC500490
SIZE
XXX/XXRXX XXPSI XXXkpa
XXPSI XXXkpa
1
4
6 5
2 3
JAG0394N

Wheels and Tires
258
L
Recommended tire pressures
The following table gives the tire pressures for all recommended tire sizes:
Checking tire pressures
The following procedure should be used
to check and adjust the tire pressures
when cold:
1. Remove the valve cover.
2. Firmly attach a tire pressure gauge or
inflator to the valve.
3. Read the tire pressure from the
gauge. If required, add air to the tire.
4. If air is added to the tire, remove the
gauge from the valve and re-attach it
before checking that the pressure is
correct. Failure to remove and
re-attach the gauge could cause the
gauge to show an incorrect reading.
5. If too much air is added, remove the
gauge from the valve and allow air out
of the tire by pressing the centre of the
valve. Reconnect the gauge to the
valve, and check that the air pressure
is correct.
6. Refit the valve cover.
A slight natural pressure loss occurs with
time. If this exceeds 14 kPa (2 lbf/in2) per
week, the cause should be investigated
and rectified.
Note: It is an offence in certain countries
to drive a vehicle with tires that are not
inflated in accordance with the vehicle’s
proper use.
Tire Size Tire Pressure
Front Rear
245/45ZR18 100Z 210 k Pa (30 lb/in2)-
275/40ZR18 103Z - 227.5 kPa (33 lb/in2)
245/40ZR19 94Y 210 kPa (30 lb/in2)-
275/35ZR19 96Y - 227.5 kPa (33 lb/in2)
255/35ZR20 97Y 210 kPa (30 lb/in2)-
285/30ZR20 99Y - 227.5 kPa (33 lb/in2)
19 inch run-flat: - -
245/40R19 RSC 94Y 210 kPa (30 lb/in2)-
275/35R19 RSC 96Y - 227.5 kPa (33 lb/in2)
Temporary use spare wheel (front or rear) 420 kPa (60 lb/in2)

259
Wheels and Tires
R
Ambient temperature pressure
compensation
If the intended journey will take the vehicle
into an area where the ambient local
temperature is known to be lower than the
journey start point, tire pressure under
inflation could occur.
A colder ambient local temperature will
reduce pressure within the tire. An effect
is to decrease sidewall height and to
increase tire shoulder wear with the
potential for tire failure. Vehicle dynamics
could also be adversely affected.
In order to minimise this effect, tire
pressures can be adjusted to
compensate before the start of the
journey. Alternatively, tire pressures can
be adjusted when the area of lower
ambient temperature is reached.
In this situation the vehicle must be left in
the ambient local temperature for a least
one hour before tire pressure is adjusted.
To compensate for colder ambient
temperatures, tire pressures should be
increased by 0.14 bar (2 lbf/in2, 14 kPa)
for each 10°C (20°F) decrease.
Note: Ensure that correct tire pressures
are maintained when moving to areas of
differing ambient temperature.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring system
(TPMS) may issue a warning if the under
inflation becomes significant. When
driving through variable climatic
conditions the TPMS warnings may be
intermittent.
In areas of extended high ambient
temperature, vehicle tires can be affected
by a softening of the tire side wall. If the
vehicle is stationary for long periods, the
effect is to slightly deform the tire at the
point where the tire meets the standing
surface. This is known as a flat spot.
This is normal tire behaviour, however,
when the vehicle is subsequently driven
vibration may be experienced from the flat
spot. The condition will steadily improve
with additional mileage.
In order to minimise this effect, tire
pressures can be adjusted to
compensate.
JAG0480G
JAG0481G

Wheels and Tires
260
L
For each 10°C (20°F) increase in
temperature above 20°C (68°F), tire
pressure should be increased by 14 kPa
(2 lbf/in2).
Tire pressure compensation chart -
high ambient temperatures
Tire Pressure Temperature
Compensation
Ambient
Temperature
0 C (0 F)
Pressure
Compensation
bar (lbf/in2 /kPa)
20 (68) use placard label
30 (86) + 0.14 (2 / 14)
40 (104) + 0.28 (4 / 28)
50 (122) + 0.41 (6 / 41)

261
Wheels and Tires
R
Tire Markings
P, 1
The P indicates the tire is for passenger
vehicles.
Tire width, 2
This three-digit number gives the width in
millimetres of the tire from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
Aspect ratio, 3
This two-digit number, known as the
aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height
to width (this is also known as the tire
profile). The lower the number, the shorter
the tire’s sidewall.
R, 4
The R stands for radial. Radial ply
construction of tires has been the industry
standard for the past 20 years.
Wheel diameter, 5
This two-digit number is the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new
tires to match the new wheel diameter.
Load index, 6
This two- or three-digit number is the
tire's load index. It is a measurement of
how much weight each tire can support.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
law.
JAG0395N
1
234 5 67
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
8

Wheels and Tires
262
L
Speed rating, 7
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time. The ratings
range from 99 mph to 186 mph. These
ratings are listed in the following table.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
law.
U.S DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN), 8
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code where it was
manufactured, and the last four numbers
represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 3197
means the 31st week of 1997. The other
numbers are marketing codes used at the
manufacturer's discretion. This
information can be used to contact
consumers if a tire defect requires a
recall.
M+S and all season icon, 9
The M+S or M/S indicates that the tire
has some mud and snow capability. Most
radial tires have these markings.
Tires with all season icon have a level of
winter performance.
Tire ply composition and materials
used, 10
The number of plies indicates the number
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the
tire. In general, the greater the number of
plies, the more weight a tire can support.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
Letter Rating Speed Rating
Q99 mph
R 106 mph
S 112 mph
T 118 mph
U 124 mph
H 130 mph
V 149 mph
W 168 mph
Y 186 mph*
* For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph, tire
manufacturers sometimes use the
letters ZR. For those with a maximum
speed capability over 186 mph, tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.

263
Wheels and Tires
R
Treadwear number, 11
This number indicates the tire's wear rate.
The higher the treadwear number is, the
longer it should take for the tread to wear
down. For example, a tire graded 400
should last twice as long as a tire graded
200.
Traction letter, 12
This letter indicates a tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement. A higher graded tire
should allow you to stop your car on wet
roads in a shorter distance than a tire with
a lower grade. Traction is graded from
highest to lowest as AA, A, B, and C.
Maximum load rating, 13
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be
carried by the tire.
Temperature letter, 14
This letter indicates a tire's resistance to
heat. The temperature grade is for a tire
that is inflated properly and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat build-up and possible tire failure.
From highest to lowest, a tire's resistance
to heat is graded as A, B, or C.
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure, 15
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
Tire pressures during long term vehicle
storage
To minimise the possibility and effects of
flat spots during storage, the tires may be
inflated to the maximum pressure
indicated on the tire sidewall.
Note: Before using the stored vehicle on
the road again, ensure that correct tire
pressures are restored.
Wear
All tires fitted as original equipment
include Tread Wear Indicators (TWI) in
their tread pattern.
When the tread has worn to a remaining
depth of 1.6 mm the indicators appear at
the surface as bars which connect the
tread pattern across the full width of the
tire.
It is illegal, in certain countries, to
continue to use tires after the tread has
worn to less than 1.6 mm over three
quarters of the width and the entire
circumference of the tire.
It should be noted that the properties of
many tires alter progressively with wear.
In particular the wet grip and aquaplaning
resistance are gradually but substantially
reduced. Extra care and speed restriction
should therefore be exercised on wet
roads as the effective tread depth
diminishes.
JAG0393G

Wheels and Tires
264
L
Incorrect wheel alignment will accelerate
tire wear. If there is wear on the inner or
outer edges of the tread pattern it will be
advantageous to have the cause detected
by having the wheel alignment checked.
Do not interchange tires from side to side,
front to rear or vice versa.
Note:
1. On all models the rear wheel and tire
assemblies are larger than the front.
These larger assemblies must never
be fitted to the front of the vehicle.
2. On certain models the tires may be
directional type. These tires must be
fitted so that when viewed from the
side of the vehicle, direction of
rotation arrow, on the tire wall, points
in the vehicle forward direction of
travel when positioned at the top of
the tire.
Damage
Caution: Do not use paraffin
(kerosene), because this has a
detrimental effect on rubber.
Excessive local distortion can cause the
casing of a tire to fracture and may lead to
premature failure. Tires should be
examined especially for cracked walls,
exposed cords, etc. Flints and other
sharp objects must be removed from the
tire tread; if left in they may work through
the cover. Clean off any oil or grease
contamination by using a suitable cleaner.
Tire repair
Damaged tires should be replaced with
new tires fitted. They must not be repaired
in view of the high performance capability
of the vehicle.
Tire replacement
When replacing tires, it is preferable to fit
a complete vehicle set. If either front or
rear tires only need to be renewed, new
tires must be fitted as axle sets.
After new tires have been fitted the
wheels need to be dynamically balanced.
Do not fit tires with a different tread
pattern, size or speed rating.
The installation of replacement tires with
steel cord body plies in the tire sidewall
may cause malfunction of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and
is not recommended (cord material
information is moulded on the tire
sidewall).
Additionally, if your vehicle was equipped
with run-flat tires, replacing them with
tires that are not identical to those
originally fitted may cause malfunction of
the TPMS, and is not recommended.
Always check your TPMS indicator after
replacing one or more tires on your
vehicle. See TPMS, page 267.
Tire ageing
!WARNING:
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. It is
recommended that tires generally be
replaced after six years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the ageing process.
You should replace the spare tire when
you replace the other road tires due to
the ageing of the spare tire.

265
Wheels and Tires
R
USING WINTER TIRES
Winter tires are more suitable during
extremes of low temperatures, snow and
ice and will considerably improve the
vehicle’s handling during these
conditions.
Do not exceed 240 km/h (150 mph) when
using Jaguar approved winter tires.
Winter tires must be fitted on all four
wheels.
Approved Winter tire sizes
Front: 245/45R18, Dunlop Wintersport
M3 96V.
Rear: 265/40R18, Dunlop Wintersport M3
97V.
Winter tire pressures:
USING SNOW CHAINS
!WARNING:
Trac DSC must be switched ON when
using snow chains. DSC would reduce
the deep snow traction capability as it
would limit wheel spin to a level below
that which is required to generate
maximum traction.
Caution: Do not fit snow chains to
20 inch tires.
Snow chains, of the recommended type,
can only be fitted to rear wheels. They
should not be used on temporary use
spare wheels.
You should contact your Jaguar Dealer
for details and availability of approved
snow chains.
The maximum speed when using snow
chains is 48 km/h (30 mph).
Remove the snow chains immediately the
roads are clear of snow.
Ensure the fitting instructions supplied
with the snow chains are kept in a safe
place, for example, with this literature
pack.
Up to 240 km/h (150 mph)
Front
(245)
2.0 bar (30 lbf/in2, 207 ka)
Rear
(265)
2.3 bar (33 lbf/in2, 230 kPa)

Wheels and Tires
266
L
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Recommended tire fitment
The following chart details the tires recommended for use in USA, Canada, Mexico and
the Dominican Republic:
For all other countries refer to your local Jaguar Dealer for specific tire fitment.
Tire size Pattern
Front 245/45ZR18 100Z Continental Sport Contact 2 Asymmetric
Rear 275/40ZR18 103Z Continental Sport Contact 2 Asymmetric
Front 245/40ZR19 94Y Dunlop Sport 01 Asymmetric
Rear 275/35ZR19 96Y Dunlop Sport 01 Asymmetric
Front 255/35ZR20 97Y Dunlop Sportmaxx Directional
Rear 285/30ZR20 99Y Dunlop Sportmaxx Directional
19 inch Run-flat
Front 245/40R19 RSC 94Y Dunlop Sport 01 DSST
Rear 275/35R19 RSC 96Y Dunlop Sport 01 DSST
Temporary use spare wheel
Front and Rear:
Alloy 4 x 18 T135/80 R18 Pirelli

267
Wheels and Tires
R
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
!WARNING:
•The TPMS is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures.
Tire pressures should be checked
regularly using an accurate
pressure gauge when cold. Failure
to properly maintain your tire
pressures could increase the risk of
tire failure, with consequential loss
of vehicle control and personal
injury.
•The TPMS cannot register damage
to a tire. Regularly check the
condition of your tires, especially if
the vehicle is driven off road.
Note:
1. Non-approved accessories may
interfere with the system. If this
occurs, TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM
FAULT is displayed in the message
centre.
2. Tires may affect the performance of
the TPMS. Always replace tires in
accordance with recommendations,
see page 266.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
TPMS which monitors pressure in each
tire (temporary use spare tires are not
fitted with sensors and are consequently
not monitored).
Wheels fitted with a TPMS can be easily
visually identified by the external metal
lock nut and valve 1. All Jaguar
non-TPMS wheels have a rubber valve
fitted 2.
TPMS operation
The TPMS monitors the pressure of the
tires via sensors located in each wheel
and a receiver located within the vehicle.
Communication between sensor and
receiver is via Radio Frequency (RF)
signals.
The tire pressure warning
comprises a yellow warning
telltale within the instrument
cluster and an associated message within
the message centre.
1
2
JAG0389G

Wheels and Tires
268
L
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
The TPMS may issue a warning if the
under inflation becomes significant. When
driving through variable climatic
conditions the TPMS warnings may be
intermittent.
Caution: When inflating tires, care
should be taken to avoid bending or
damage to the TPMS valves. Always
ensure correct alignment of the
inflation head to the valve stem.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating
properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
AVE FUEL
A
MPG
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
JAG0060NAS

269
Wheels and Tires
R
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
A supplementary text message will
accompany the system indicator and will
display TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM
FAULT.
Temporary use spare wheel and tire
change
Should it be necessary to change a wheel
and tire with the temporary use spare,
then the system will automatically
recognise the change in wheel positions.
Then after approximately ten minutes of
driving above 25 km/h (18 mph) , a text
message TIRE NOT MONITORED will be
displayed accompanied by illumination of
the warning telltale and the corresponding
block in the vehicle graphic.
The warning telltale will initially flash and
will subsequently revert to continuous
illumination. Extended use of the
temporary use spare wheel will produce
an additional text message TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT.
The TPMS display sequence will be
activated at every ignition cycle until the
temporary use spare wheel is replaced by
a fully operational full size wheel and tire
assembly.
Always replace the temporary use spare
wheel before having TPMS faults
investigated. The fault may well be
rectified with the fitment of a fully
operational full size running tire in lieu of
the temporary use wheel and tire
assembly.
If a tire needs to be changed
It is recommended that you should always
have your tires serviced by a Jaguar
Dealer.
If a TPMS is fitted, each wheel and tire
assembly, with the exception of a
temporary use spare is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor connected to the tire
valve stem.
In order to avoid damage to the sensor
the tires must be removed and refitted to
the road wheel in a specific manner. Care
must be taken to avoid contact between
the bead of the tire and the sensor during
removal and refitting of the tire, otherwise
the sensor may become damaged and or
inoperable.
Caution: Valve stem seal, washer, nut,
valve core and cap should be replaced
at every tire change. Valve stem seal,
washer and nut must be replaced if
valve retention nut is loosened. Sensor
units and nuts must be refitted using
correct torques and associated torque
profile. Damage to the vehicle may
result if these precautions are not
taken.
Sensors can be removed from the wheel
by the unscrewing of the valve retention
nut.
Replacement sensor fitment
procedure
A replacement sensor must be fitted to a
running wheel in order to be recognised
by the system. Recognition only occurs
when the vehicle is driven above 25 km/h
(18 mph) for approximately ten minutes.

Wheels and Tires
270
L
Should the TPMS warning for any wheel
not clear, even after ensuring correct
inflation pressures and driving for more
than ten minutes above 25 km/h (18 mph),
contact your Jaguar Dealer.
TPMS information messages
Message Warning
Light
Priority
Indicator
Meaning
CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE
(Graphic indication
displays which tire is
under inflated.)
TPMS Amber You should as soon as possible
stop, check your tire and inflate
them to the recommended
pressure.
CHECK ALL TIRE
PRESSURES
TPMS Amber One or more tire is significantly
under-inflated. You stop as soon
as possible, check your tires and
inflate them to the recommended
pressure. This message may be
displayed when the vehicle is
learning a new sensor to vehicle
and one or more tires has low
pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM FAULT
TPMS Amber 1. You have fitted wheels and
tires which do not have TPMS
sensors. You should as soon as
possible have TPMS sensors
fitted to wheels and tires.
2. TPMS sensors have become
defective, an unapproved
accessory is interfering with the
TPMS or a general fault has been
detected in the TPMS. Contact a
Jaguar Dealer as soon as
possible.

271
Wheels and Tires
R
TIRE NOT MONITORED
(Graphic indication
displays which tire is not
monitored.)
TPMS Amber 1. You have a temporary use
spare wheel fitted at the
corresponding position.
You should limit your vehicle
speed to 80 km/h (50 mph)
and as soon as possible
replace the temporary use
spare wheel with a correctly
inflated full size tire.
2. The TPMS sensor, at the
corresponding position, has
become defective, an
unapproved accessory is
interfering with the TPMS or
you have fitted a wheel and
tire which does not have a
sensor. Contact a Jaguar
Dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS information messages
Message Warning
Light
Priority
Indicator
Meaning

Wheels and Tires
272
L
WHEEL CHANGING
!WARNING:
•Always ensure replacement tires
have the correct rating and
specifications (e.g. load index, size,
speed rating) for your vehicle.
•When using tires other than those
recommended by Jaguar, do not
exceed the speed capacity
recommended by the
manufacturer.
•Wheels are extremely heavy. Take
care when lifting and particularly
when removing and replacing a
wheel in its storage position in the
luggage compartment.
If a wheel change is required, pull off the
road completely. Park on ground which is
as level and solid as possible. Ensure that
the vehicle is clear of any objects that will
obstruct the safe removal of the wheel.
Switch on hazard warning lights and,
where legally required, display the
warning triangle.
Regular maintenance of tires contributes
not only to safety, but to the designed
function of the vehicle. Road-holding,
steering and braking are especially
vulnerable to incorrectly pressurised,
badly fitted or worn tires.
Tires of the correct size and type, but of
different make can varying
characteristics. It is therefore
recommended that Jaguar approved tires
are fitted to all wheels.
Caution: Ultra high performance tires.
This vehicle is equipped with an Ultra
High Performance (UHP) tire and wheel
combination designed to give
maximum dry road performance with
consideration for aquaplaning
resistance. UHP tires have
performance enhancing soft rubber
tread compound. If driven aggressively
they may suffer rapid tread wear and a
shorter life than can be expected from
other tire types. This wheel and tire
combination is more susceptible to
damage from road hazards.
Do not use this combination for driving
on snow or ice. High perfromance tires
must be replaced with winter tires
when weather conditions dictate.
Temporary use spare wheel
IMPORTANT - USE OF SPARE TIRE
Observe the following warnings before
using the wheel:
!WARNING:
•Please note temporary use spare
wheel warning label. Adhere to
instructions on the label. Failure to
comply can be dangerous.
•When a temporary use spare wheel
is fitted, drive with caution and
replace with the specified wheel
and tire as soon as possible.
•Do not fit more than one temporary
use spare wheel and tire assembly
at one time.
•The temporary use spare wheel
must be inflated to 4.2 bar (60 lb/in2,
420 kPa) and cannot be repaired.

273
Wheels and Tires
R
•Temporary use spare wheel,
maximum speed is 80 km/h
(50 mph).
•If the vehicle is fitted with Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) refer to page 267.
•DSC must be ON when the
temporary use spare wheel is in
use.
Run-flat tires
!WARNING:
If a run-flat is deflated maximum
vehicle speed must not exceed 80 km/h
(50 mph).
Run-flat tires can be identified by the
lettering RSC on the sidewall. The tire
construction utilises a specially reinforced
sidewall which allows the vehicle to be
driven at restricted speeds even when the
tire is depressurised. Run-flat tires can
only be fitted to special rims constructed
for run-flat tire use.
A tire pressure monitoring system is
mandatory when the vehicle is fitted with
run-flat tires, see page 267.
If the tire in a deflated the vehicle should
be driven with caution, as handling
characteristics will be different compared
to a fully inflated tire.
If the vehicle is fully laden with
passengers and luggage, the maximum
distance that can be completed on a fully
deflated tire is approximately
80 kilometres (50 miles).
Stop immediately if the tire construction
begins to break down, or if the tire
dislodges from the wheel rim. Typically,
this will be accompanied with excessive
vibration.
A tire driven in a deflated condition it must
be replaced.
Vehicles fitted with run-flat tires are not
fitted with a spare wheel or jacking
equipment. Therefore, run-flat tires
should be replaced with the same type of
tire.
JAG0384G

Wheels and Tires
274
L
Locking wheel nuts
Vehicles may be equipped with a locking
wheel nut on each wheel. These are
similar to standard wheel nuts, and can
only be removed using the special
adaptor provided with the jacking
equipment.
1. Insert the adaptor firmly onto the
locking wheel nut.
2. Using the wheel brace, unscrew the
wheel nut and adaptor.
3. Return the locking wheel nut adaptor
to the correct storage position.
Note: A code number is stamped on the
side of the locking nut. Ensure the number
is recorded on the Security Card supplied
with the literature pack. Quote this
number if a replacement is required. Do
not keep the Security Card in the vehicle.
Spare wheel location
The spare wheel and jacking equipment
are stored under the luggage
compartment floor panel.
To remove the spare wheel, remove the
luggage compartment floor panel and the
tray containing the jacking equipment.
Unscrew the spare wheel retaining Tee
bolt and remove the spare wheel.
Remove the jack and wheel nut wrench
from the stowage tray.
Note: Examine the jack occasionally and
clean and grease the threads to ensure it
is always ready for an emergency.
JAG0561G
JAG0386G

275
Wheels and Tires
R
Wheel changing procedure
!WARNING:
•Before attempting to lift the vehicle
with the jack, chock the wheel
diagonally opposite to the wheel
being replaced to prevent the
vehicle from rolling when jacked
up. A wheel chock is supplied with
the jacking equipment for this
purpose.
•Never work under the vehicle using
only the jack as a support, always
use axle stands or suitable
supports under the jacking points.
Note: When one rear wheel is lifted off the
ground the selection P (Park) position will
not prevent the vehicle from moving and
possibly slipping off the jack as the
parkbrake only operates on the rear
wheels.
1. Ensure that all passengers are in a
safe place, clear of the vehicle.
2. Apply the parkbrake and select gear
position P (Park).
3. Ensure that the jack is placed on firm
and level ground.
Observe the instructions printed on the
jack.
Use the jack only for lifting the vehicle
during wheel changing and only use the
jack which is stored in the vehicle.
Before raising the vehicle slacken but do
not remove the wheel nuts.
Do not start or run the engine while the
vehicle is supported only by a jack.
There are four jacking points on the
underside of the floor. Two indented,
triangular indicators are provided on each
sill cover. These indicate the location for
the jack.
The simplest way to correctly locate the
jacking point is to feel along the sill panel
to the triangular indentation and then fit
the jack to the body, not to the sill panel.
JAG0387G

Wheels and Tires
276
L
Raising the vehicle
!WARNING:
•Do not attempt to lift the vehicle
unless the jack head is fully
engaged in the jacking point.
•Ensure that the parkbrake is
applied.
Caution: Ensure before raising the
vehicle that the jack is correctly
positioned to avoid any damage to the
vehicle sills or sill panels.
Carefully raise the vehicle by turning the
jack handle. Stop jacking the vehicle
when the tire just clears the ground.
Minimum tire lift gives maximum vehicle
stability.
Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.
To remove the centre badge use the
plastic tipped end of the wheel nut
wrench handle, push the centre badge
from its housing from the inside of the
wheel.
Push the centre badge into the
replacement wheel. If the temporary use
spare wheel is to be fitted, keep the
centre badge safely and fit it to the
repaired full size wheel when it has been
refitted.
Fit the spare wheel and loosely secure
with the wheel nuts.
Using the wheel nut wrench, lightly
tighten the wheel nuts alternately using
the sequence shown in the illustration.
Tightening the wheel nuts
Lower the jack and tighten the wheel nuts
alternately, Do not over tighten by using
foot pressure or extension bars on the
wheel nut wrench.
At the earliest opportunity have the wheel
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
125 Nm (92 lb.ft).
This torque must not be exceeded.
Stowing the equipment
Place the storage tray with the jack and
wrench in the wheel well.
Reposition the luggage compartment
floor panel.
Place the removed road wheel in the
luggage compartment. The full size road
wheel will not be able to be completely
stowed in the wheel well.
Caution: Convertible only. The luggage
separator will required to be removed
before stowing the wheel in the
luggage compartment, see page 151.
JAG0388G
1
4
2
5
3

277
Wheels and Tires
R
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT
OF TRANSPORTATION/
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following information relates to the
tire grading system developed by the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration which will grade tires by
tread wear, traction and temperature
performance.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from the highest to
the lowest are AA,A, B and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
!WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests and does not include
cornering (turning) traction tests and
does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
!WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not over loaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat build-up
and possible tire failure.

Wheels and Tires
278
L
TIRE GLOSSARY
Cold tire pressure:
Pressure in a tire that has been driven for
less than one mile or has been standing
for three hours or more.
Maximum inflation pressure:
Maximum air pressure, to which a cold
tire may be inflated, this figure (in kPa and
psi) is moulded onto the sidewall of a tire.
Curb weight:
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, coolant
and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine.
Accessory weight:
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Production options weight:
The combined weight of those installed
production options weighing over 1.4 kg
(3 lb) in excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory
weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride
levellers, roof rack, heavy duty battery
and special trim.
Vehicle capacity weight:
The rated cargo and luggage load plus
68.0 kg (150.0 lb) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight:
This is the sum of:
•Curb weight.
•Accessory weight.
•Vehicle capacity weight.
•Production options weight.
Rim:
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Bead:
The part of the tire that is made of steel
wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords
and that is shaped to fit the rim.

279
Wheels and Tires
R
PRODUCTION OPTIONS
WEIGHTS
(USA only)
This table lists the production options
weights. To calculate the curbweight of
your vehicle, add the weight of all
production options, including optional
alloy wheels and spare wheel, to the basic
curbweight for your vehicle.
Note: The table only lists optional
equipment that weigh more than 3.0 lb
(1.4 kg).
!WARNING:
Do not exceed the weight limits
specified on the TIRE LOADING
INFORMATION label (see page 257).
To calculate the cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle, refer to page
280.
Note:
The weights listed under Wheels and tires give the increase in weight over a standard
set of four wheels: the figure only needs to be added to the curbweight once. The Spare
wheel and tire weight must also be added, where applicable.
Weight
lb kg
Curb weight, no options fitted
See Technical Specification Weight Tables pages 283 and 284.
Production options
Jaguar Premium Surround Sound System 13.23 6.0
Sirius Satellite Radio 2.87 1.3
Navigation 4.9 2.2
16 way luxury sport seats 7.72 3.5
Adaptive Front Lighting System 3.31 1.5
Wheels and tires
18 inch wheels (Venus) 0 0
19 inch wheels (Carelia) 16.54 7.5
20 inch wheels (Senta), supercharged available 18.96 8.6
20 inch wheels (Senta), normally aspirated, if available 26.46 12.0
19 inch Run-flat tires (Sabre) deletes Temporary use spare wheel,
supercharged.
- 4.0 - 8.82
19 inch Run-flat tires (Sabre) deletes Temporary use spare wheel,
normally aspirated.
- 5.51 - 2.5

Wheels and Tires
280
L
Steps for determining correct load limit
!WARNING:
Do not exceed the vehicle capacity
weight (the total weight of driver,
passengers and cargo) given on the
tire information label (see page 257).
1. Locate the statement, The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXXX kg or
XXXX lb on your vehicle’s placard (see
page 257).
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXXX kg
or XXXX lb (weight given on placard).
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if
the XXXX amount equals 1400 lb, and
there will be five 150 lb passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lb:
1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb).
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The number and weight of passengers will
affect the cargo and luggage load
capacity. In the example above, the cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
However, if fewer passengers ride in the
vehicle, the luggage load capacity will
increase. If this vehicle carries three
150 lb passengers, the cargo and luggage
load capacity will increase to 950 lb:
(3 x 150 = 450 lb, and
1400 - 450 = 950 lb).
If the passengers weigh more, the cargo
and luggage load capacity will decrease.
!WARNING:
•The weight of accessories must
also be subtracted from the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity. If you are unsure of the
weight of any accessories fitted to
your vehicle, contact your Jaguar
Dealer.
•Overloading the vehicle will have an
adverse affect on braking and
handling characteristics, which
could compromise your safety.
Overloading a vehicle may also
cause tire damage or failure.
Never overload your vehicle.
•TOWING: The XK has not been
designed as a towing vehicle and
Jaguar Cars does not manufacture
a tow bar for the vehicle.

281
Vehicle Identification
R
Chapter 9
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
It is essential that the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) is quoted in all
correspondence and when ordering
replacement parts.
The number is visible from outside the
vehicle, on a plate in the lower left-hand
edge of the windshield.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
Vehicles have the Certification Label
adhered to the left-hand door rear post.
Vehicle weights, paint code, manufacture
date and the VIN are shown on this plate.
ENGINE NUMBER
The number is located on the rear
left-hand side of the engine below the
rectangular block.
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
The number is etched on a plinth on the
side of the transmission casing.
JAG0396G
JAG0397G

Technical Specifications
282
L
Technical Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
Engine 4.2 litre V8
Capacity 4196 cm3 (255 inch3)Stroke 90.3 mm (3.555 inch)
Bore 86.0 mm (3.385 inch) Compression ratio 11.0:1 (9.1:1 supercharged)
JAG0398G
G
H
C
B
F
A
D
E
AOverall width, mirrors extended 2070 mm 81.5 in.
BOverall width, mirrors folded 1892 mm 74.5 in.
BOverall width, mirrors folded, rear arch extensions fitted 1912 mm 75.3 in.
CTrack: Front (maximum) 1560 mm 61.0 in.
DOverall height at gross vehicle weight (nominal) - Coupe 1287mm 50.6 in.
DOverall height at gross vehicle weight (nominal) -
Convertible
1294 mm 51.0 in.
EMinimum ground clearance (at gross vehicle weight) 100 mm 4.0 in.
FTrack: Rear (maximum) 1608 mm 63.3 in.
GWheelbase 2752 mm 108 in.
HOverall length 4791 mm 187 in.
Turning circle (curb to curb) 10.97 m 36.0 ft.

283
Technical Specifications
R
WEIGHTS
(AVERAGE/APPROXIMATE)
V8 4.2 litre normally aspirated engine
Note: Loads greater than 28 kg (62 lb)
may be carried in the luggage
compartment provided the maximum
technically permissible axle weights
shown on the vehicle identification plate
are not exceeded and the tires are inflated
to the normal pressures.
Coupe Convertible
kg lb kg lb
Curb weight (no options fitted) 1665 3671 1705 3759
Front axle Curb weight 887 1956 888 1958
Rear axle Curb weight 778 1715 817 1801
Gross Vehicle Weight (G.V.W.) 2035 4486 2075 4575
Gross front axle weight 1015 2238 1020 2249
Gross rear axle weight 1090 2403 1125 2480
Maximum recommended luggage
compartment load with passenger
and driver
28 62 28 62

Technical Specifications
284
L
V8 4.2 litre supercharged engine
Note: Loads greater than 28 kg (62 lb)
may be carried in the luggage
compartment provided the maximum
technically permissible axle weights
shown on the vehicle identification plate
are not exceeded and the tires are inflated
to the normal pressures.
Coupe Convertible
kg lb kg lb
Curb weight (no options fitted) 1730 3814 1780 3924
Front axle Curb weight 935 2061 943 2079
Rear axle Curb weight 795 1753 837 1845
Gross Vehicle Weight (G.V.W.) 2080 4586 2120 4674
Gross front axle weight 1050 2315 1050 2315
Gross rear axle weight 1095 2414 1130 2491
Maximum recommended luggage
compartment load with passenger
and driver
28 62 28 62

285
Technical Specifications
R
CAPACITIES
Fuel capacity
V8 4.2 litre normally aspirated engine
Litres Pints
Engine oil, including oil filter. 7.0 14.8
Cooling system, including reservoir and climate control. 10.4 22.0
Windshield and headlamp washer reservoir: 6.3 13.3
V8 4.2 litre supercharged engine
Litres Pints
Engine oil, including oil filter. 7.0 14.8
Cooling system, including reservoir and climate control. 10.0 21.1
Windshield and headlamp washer reservoir: 6.6 14.0
Total tank
capacity
71.1 litres
(18.8 Gallons)
Fill capacity
(when the fuel
gauge indicates
empty)
65.5 litres
(17.2 Gallons)
Reserve capacity
(when the fuel
gauge indicates
empty)
6.0 litres
(1.6 Gallons)

Type Approvals
286
L
Type Approvals
SMART KEY REMOTE
CONTROL RADIO FREQUENCY
The radio frequency remote system
operates on a frequency subject to USA
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) rules.
The device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules and RSS-210 of the Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the two
following conditions:
•The device may not cause harmful
interference.
•This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The key transmitter radio frequency
approval numbers for the USA and
Canada are shown below:
USA - CWTWB1U243
Canada - 1788A-1U243
Note: The manufacturer is not
responsible for any radio interference or
TV interference caused by unauthorised
modifications to this equipment. Changes
or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Caution: The Jaguar Smart Key may
suffer interference from other legal
users of this radio frequency band,
such as radio amateurs, medical
equipment, remote controls or alarm
systems. To lock or unlock the vehicle
in such a situation, either use a key or
operate the key transmitter as close to
the security antenna on the front
screen as possible.
DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY FOR THE
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
Export controls
This product contains commodities,
technology or software exported from the
United States in accordance with the
Export Administration regulations.
Diversion contrary to U.S. or Canadian
law is prohibited.
FCC/Industry Canada Notice
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC ID: AZ489FT7024
Canada IC: 109U-89FT7024
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation.

287
Type Approvals
R
This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the
following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
DOLBY LICENSING
Dolby Pro Logic
Surround and the
double-D are
registered trademark
of Dolby Laboratories. Manufacturing
rights for Dolby Pro Logic Surround
System are licensed from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS devices comply with part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the manufacture
could void the users’ authority to operate
the equipment.
The TPMS radio frequency approval
numbers for the USA and Canada are
shown below:
USA FCC ID: KR5S120123,
TX KR55WK47594, RX 5WK4887.
Canada IC: 267T-S120123,
267T-5WK47594, CAN2671032336A.
288
L

Index
289
R
A
Accessory socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Active headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . 172
forward alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Adjusting the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Advanced restraint technology system
(ARTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Air bags
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
occupancy sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
warning lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Alarms and audible signals . . . . . . . . . 49
Anti-lock braking system (ABS). . . . . 162
Audible warnings and indicators . . . . 116
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
auto memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
automatic volume control . . . . . . . 190
band switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
CD operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
compact disc player . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dolby licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
load a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
MP3 CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
premium sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
preset stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
programme type (PTY) . . . . . . . . . 188
radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
recordable CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
seek tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
unload a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Autolamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
windshield wiper detection . . . . . . . 72
Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . 180
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 157
gear selector positions. . . . . . . . . 157
gearshift interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Jaguar sequential shift mode gear
selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
system fault display . . . . . . . . . . . 161
B
Battery
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
disconnection effects. . . . . . . . . . 246
maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
using booster cables . . . . . . . . . . 243
warning signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Bi-Xenon headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Booster seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Brake fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
emergency brake assist . . . . . . . . 163
Bulbs
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
C
Catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Checking and top up
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 241
windshield/headlamp washer . . . 239
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
choosing a child seat . . . . . . . . . . 104
fitting the child seat . . . . . . . . . . . 105
infant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
LATCH seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
restraint check list . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
top tether anchorages . . . . . . . . . 106
Climate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Clock adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Index
290
L
Computer active technology system
(CATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Convenience mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Convertible top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
closing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
luggage separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
deploy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
normal stowage. . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
manual re-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
winter conditions. . . . . . . . . . 150, 228
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
information messages. . . . . . . . . . 171
D
Dimmer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Driving after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Driving hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Dynamic stability control. . . . . . . . . . 165
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
E
Electric park brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Electrical accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Emergency brake assist . . . . . . . . . . 163
Engine
coolant check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
keyless start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
oil check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
oil consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
rolling re-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
starting and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . 50
stationary vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Environmental information . . . . . . . . 232
Event data recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Exterior lighting
daylight running lamps. . . . . . . . . . 73
exit delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
touring adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
F
Facia and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Fire extinguisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Floor mat retention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Forward alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Front seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fuel and refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
refuelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
system fault display . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fuel capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fuel requirements
gasoline engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
fuse box locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
specification chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
G
Garage door transceiver . . . . . . . . . 143
before programming . . . . . . . . . . 144
information and assistance . . . . . 146
programming the vehicle . . . . . . . 144
Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
General driving information
engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . 56
running-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Ground points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
H
Hazard warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Headlamp powerwash . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Health and safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
I
Identification numbers
vehicle identification number . . . . 281
Inertia switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Index
291
R
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
dimmer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
message centre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Interior features
centre console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
cigar lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . 140
glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
accessory socket . . . . . . . . . . . 142
sunvisors
vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Interior lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
J
Jaguar parts and accessories . . . . . . . 31
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
K
Key transmitter radio frequency . . . . 286
Keyless entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Keyless starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Keys
key transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Keys and remote controls . . . . . . . . . . 34
information messages . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Smart Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Kickdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
L
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
auto headlamp levelling . . . . . . . . . 76
autolamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
battery saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
bulb replacement
cornering lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
front direction indicator . . . . . . . 80
front sidelamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
headlamp assembly . . . . . . . . . . 77
license plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 83
main and dipped beam . . . . . . . 81
rear lamp unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
side marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
side repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
entry and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
front fog lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
hazard warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 74
reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
rear fog lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
sidelamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Locking the vehicle
drive-away locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
external locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
internal locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Locking wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Luggage compartment. . . . . . . . 43, 156
emergency release. . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Luggage separator
deploy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
normal stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
M
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
regular servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Index
292
L
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
passenger seat position . . . . . . . . 139
recalling memorised position . . . . 139
setting driving position . . . . . . . . . 139
Message centre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
heating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . 90
O
Occupant protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
On-board event data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
P
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Parkbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
system fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
touch-screen setting . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Power steering
fluid check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Powerwash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Production option weights . . . . . . . . 279
Protect the environment . . . . . . . . . . 232
Puncture
wheel changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
R
Radio
display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Radio reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Rain sensitive wiper control . . . . . . . . 66
Rear impact protection . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Rear window operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Reception quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Recommended engine oil . . . . . . . . . 238
Regular servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Remote headlight convenience. . . . . . 49
Reporting safety defects. . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reservoir and dipstick locations
normally aspirated engine . . . 235, 236
Rollover protection system . . . . . . . . 102
Run-flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
final drive unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
S
Satellite radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
preset radio stations . . . . . . . . . . 200
recalling presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
receiving satellite broadcasts . . . 199
song seek. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
subscription to SIRIUS. . . . . . . . . 208
Seat belts
beltminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
during pregnancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
tension sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Seat heaters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
driving position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
seatback tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Security
alarms and audible signals . . . . . . 49
immobiliser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Service data recording. . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Smart Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
battery renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
convenience mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
irregular operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Snow chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Spare wheel location . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
cruise controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Index
293
R
T
Technical data
engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Technical specifications
capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Telephone
answer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
automatic answering . . . . . . . . . . . 214
bluetooth description . . . . . . . . . . 210
call continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
caller announce. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
changing a phone number . . . . . . 217
directory capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
directory, auto download . . . . . . . 215
do not disturb option. . . . . . . . . . . 221
ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
erase the telephone directory . . . . 216
handsfree, ending a call . . . . . . . . 220
handsfree, making a call . . . . . . . . 220
last 10 options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
magnify keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
name search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
pairing and docking. . . . . . . . . . . . 211
pairing other phones . . . . . . . . . . . 213
receiving a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
retrieving voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . 214
ringtones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
setting up your phone for use . . . . 211
settings menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . 220
system overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
using a different phone . . . . . . . . . 213
using your phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
voice mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Temporary use spare wheel . . . . . . . 272
Tire pressure monitoring system. . . . 267
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
locking nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
recommended fitment . . . . . . . . . 266
renewal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
run-flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
uniform tire quality grades . . . . . . 277
wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
wheel changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
winter/snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
languages and units . . . . . . . . . . . 125
menu structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Pop-up messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Timeout to home screen . . . . . . . 126
use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Towing eye. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Type approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
U
Using booster cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
V
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Index
294
L
Vehicle care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
alloy wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
automatic car wash. . . . . . . . . . . . 227
bird droppings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
carpet and mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
cloth and fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
convertible top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
glass surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
grease and tar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
high pressure wash . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
paint chips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
underhood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
washing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . 227
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
VIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
W
Warning lights and indicators . . . . . . 112
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Warnings, cautions and notes. . . . . . . 30
Warranty
Mexico. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
USA and Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Washer fluid check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Wheel changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Wheel/tire data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
temporary use spare wheel. . . . . . 272
tire pressures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
wheel changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Whiplash protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Window tinting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Windows
anti-trap detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Windshield wipers/washers . . . . . . . . 65
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Winter/snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265